Micom p225

MiCOM P225
Motor Protection Relay
P225/EN T/C21
Technical Guide
Content P225/EN AD/B21 P225/EN T/B11 V6.D V1-V6
Note:
The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information. Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the technical manual. This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
The Schneider Electric logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of Schneider Electric. MiCOM is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric. All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether registered or not, are the property of their owners. This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. 2010, Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
MiCOM P225
P225/EN AD/B21
Update Documentation
Update Documentation MiCOM P225
P225/EN AD/B21
UPDATE DOCUMENTATION
P225/EN AD/B21
P225/EN AD/B21 (AD) -1
P225 UPDATE DOCUMENTATION

In firmware version V6.D of MiCOM P225 there are some minor enhancements where digital opto inputs can be assigned to LEDs and also output relays. These changes are described with reference to the documentation listed below: Release 15.11.2004 Document Ref. P225/EN FT/B11 Section Version P225/EN T/B11 Page No. Documentation Technical Guide Description The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus Table added to show led assignment. 4.5.3 13 Input 1-6 are new. The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu: Auxiliary programmable output relays Table added to show output relay 2-5 assignment. 4.11.7 40 Input 1-6 are new.
P225/EN AD/B21 (AD) -2
USER GUIDE (P225/EN FT/B11)

4.5.3 The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus Four identical sub-menus - LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 are used to configure the 4 programmable LEDs of the MiCOM P225 relay. The user can assign one or several indications to each of these LEDs. These data can originate inside the relay (protection, automatic control, or internal logic state function) or outside the relay (logic input). One LED is lit if at least one of the pieces of information associated with it is valid (logic OR). It is extinguished: either after acknowledgement of the associated data item or items or on the disappearance of the data item or items which gave rise to it.
The "EMERG. RESTART" information is activated: either following reception of an emergency start command via the logic input programmed on "EMERG. RESTART". It stays lit up as long as the associated logic input is excited or following an emergency start remote order sent via the communication network. It will be extinguished when the "SUCCESSFUL START" information appears.
The "FORBIDDEN START" information is active if at least one of the 4 pieces of data blocking signals is active: either thermal blocking start " FORBID.START" or blocking due to limitation of the number of starts "START NB LIMIT " or blocking due to a minimum time between 2 starts "T betw 2 start". or blocking due to a minimum time between a stop and a start "ABS".
The motor shut down information "MOTOR STOPPED" is activated when logic input L1 (terminals 22-24) is not excited. It remains active until logic input L1 is excited. The motor running information "MOTOR RUNNING" is activated when logic input L1 (terminals 22-24) is excited. It remains active until logic input L1 is de-energised. The successful start information "SUCCESSFUL START" is activated after a motor start phase if at the end of the time delay t Istart the following criteria are respected: the locked rotor at start information ""LOCKED ROTOR" is not present the excessively long start information "EXCES LONG START" is not present.
This information stays active until the motor shuts down (de-energisation of logic input L1).
P225/EN AD/B21 (AD) -3
The following table lists the protection functions that can be assigned to the LEDs (5 to 8) for the P225: TEXT Teta ALARM THERM OVERLOAD tI0> tI0>> tI>> tI2> tI2>> tI< EXCES LONG START tIstall LOCKED ROTOR EMERG START FORBIDDEN START T RTD1,2,3 ALARM T RTD1,2,3 TRIP T RTD4,5,6 ALARM T RTD4,5,6 TRIP TRIP CIRCUIT FAIL T EXT 1 T EXT 2 MOTOR STOPPED MOTOR RUNNING SUCCESSFUL START T RTD7,8,9,10 ALARM T RTD7,8,9,10 TRIP tV< VOLTAGE DIP tV> BUS VOLTAGE CB FAIL INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INFORMATION Thermal overload alarm Thermal overload trip Time delayed earth fault stage 1 trip Time delayed earth fault stage 2 trip Time delayed overcurrent (short circuit) trip Time delayed (unbalance) overcurrent stage 1 trip Time delayed (unbalance) overcurrent stage 2 trip negative negative phase phase sequence sequence
Time delayed undercurrent (loss of load) trip Excessive long start (stall when starting using time delayed overcurrent) Time delayed stall when running Locked rotor (stall when starting using speed input) Emergency start Forbidden/blocked motor start Time delayed RTD 1, 2, 3 alarm Time delayed RTD 1, 2, 3 trip Time delayed RTD 4, 5, 6 alarm Time delayed RTD 4, 5, 6 trip Trip circuit failure Time delayed external logic 1 Time delayed external Logic 2 Motor stopped Motor running Successful start Time delayed RTD 7, 8, 9, 10 alarm Time delayed RTD 7, 8, 9, 10 trip Time delayed undervoltage trip Voltage dip Time delayed overvoltage trip Instantaneous busbar voltage is below threshold CB Fail Digital/opto input 1 Digital/opto input 2 Digital/opto input 3 Digital/opto input 4
P225/EN AD/B21 (AD) -4 TEXT INPUT 5 INPUT 6 Digital/opto input 5 Digital/opto input 6 INFORMATION
4.11.7
The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : Auxiliary programmable output relays In this menu the user assigns the MiCOM P225 internal and external data to the auxiliary output relays (relays RL2, RL3, RL4 or RL5). These are changeover type relays (1 common, 1 normally open contact, 1 normally close contact). One relay is switched on when at least one of the data items linked to it is valid (OR logic). It drops back once all its associated data has disappeared. Data assignable to the auxiliary output relays can be: of the internal type logic state of a protection function (instantaneous, time delayed signals) logic state of an automatism or state function (blocking start, successful start) the result of an AND logic equation
of the external type signal received via logic inputs (EXT1 , EXT2 , EXT3 and EXT4 , Input 1-6) signal received via the communication network (remote control by the supervisor)
The following table lists the protection functions that can be assigned to the output relays (2 to 5) for the P225: TEXT THERM OV. Teta ALARM Teta FORBID Start I>> tI>> I0> tI0> I0>> tI0>> tI2> tI2>> EXCES LG START tIstall LOCKED ROTOR tI< START NB LIMIT Thermal overload trip Thermal overload alarm Thermal overload level forbids/blocks motor start Instantaneous (start) overcurrent (short circuit) element Time delayed overcurrent (short circuit) trip Instantaneous (start) earth fault stage 1 element Time delayed earth fault stage 1 trip Instantaneous (start) earth fault stage 2 element Time delayed earth fault stage 2 trip Time delayed (unbalance) overcurrent stage 1 trip Time delayed (unbalance) overcurrent stage 2 trip negative negative phase phase sequence sequence INFORMATION
Excessive long start (stall when starting using time delayed overcurrent) Time delayed stall when running Locked rotor (stall when starting using speed input) Time delayed undercurrent (loss of load) trip Number of hot/cold starts limit exceeded
Update Documentation MiCOM P225 TEXT T betw 2 start tRTD1 ALARM tRTD1 TRIP tRTD2 ALARM tRTD2 TRIP tRTD3 ALARM tRTD3 TRIP tRTD4 ALARM tRTD4 TRIP tRTD5 ALARM tRTD5 TRIP tRTD6 ALARM tRTD6 TRIP tRTD7 ALARM tRTD7 TRIP tRTD8 ALARM tRTD8 TRIP tRTD9 ALARM tRTD9 TRIP tRTD10 ALARM tRTD10 TRIP EXT 1 EXT 2 EXT 3 EXT 4 ABS tV< VOLTAGE DIP BUS VOLTAGE CLOSE ORDER TRIP ORDER ORDER 1 ORDER 2 SUCCESS START tEQU. A tEQU. B tEQU. C tEQU. D CB OPEN TIME INFORMATION Time between two starts limit exceeded Time delayed RTD 1 alarm Time delayed RTD 1 trip Time delayed RTD 2 alarm Time delayed RTD 2 trip Time delayed RTD 3 alarm Time delayed RTD 3 trip Time delayed RTD 4 alarm Time delayed RTD 4 trip Time delayed RTD 5 alarm Time delayed RTD 5 trip Time delayed RTD 6 alarm Time delayed RTD 6 trip Time delayed RTD 7 alarm Time delayed RTD 7 trip Time delayed RTD 8 alarm Time delayed RTD 8 trip Time delayed RTD 9 alarm Time delayed RTD 9 trip Time delayed RTD 10 alarm Time delayed RTD 10 trip Time delayed external logic 1 Time delayed external Logic 2 Time delayed external logic 3 Time delayed external Logic 4 Anti-backspin trip Time delayed undervoltage trip Voltage dip
P225/EN AD/B21 (AD) -5
Instantaneous busbar voltage is below threshold CB Close order CB Trip order Remote order 1 via rear communications port Remote order 2 via rear communications port Successful start Time delayed logic output from equation A Time delayed logic output from equation B Time delayed logic output from equation C Time delayed logic output from equation D CB opening time limit exceeded (CB Supervision)
P225/EN AD/B21 (AD) -6 TEXT CB OPER NB SAn CB FAIL TRIP CIRC. FAIL GROUP 2 ACTIVE INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INFORMATION Number of CB trips limit exceeded
Broken current (In, where n =1 or 2) limit exceeded (CB Supervision) CB Fail Trip circuit failure Group 2 is active Digital/opto input 1 Digital/opto input 2 Digital/opto input 3 Digital/opto input 4 Digital/opto input 5 Digital/opto input 6
Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE Phone: Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 Publishing: Schneider Electric 11/2010
www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P225/EN AD/B21
2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
MiCOM P225
P225/EN T/B11
Technical Guide
Technical Guide MiCOM P225
P225/EN T/B11 Page 1/2
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY MiCOM P225 CONTENT

Connection Diagram Technical Data User Guide Menu of the HMI Commissioning and Maintenance Communication Default Setting Value Installation Guide Test Report P225/EN CO/B11 P225/EN TD/B11 P225/EN FT/B11 P225/EN HI/B11 P225/EN CM/B11 P225/EN CT/B11 P225/EN SV/B11 P225/EN IN/B11 P225/EN RS/B11
P225/EN T/B11 Page 2/2
Technical Guide MiCOM P225
BLANK PAGE
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
SAFETY SECTION
Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Safety Section Page 1/8
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION FOR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2
INTRODUCTION HEALTH AND SAFETY SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
Symbols Labels
3 3 4
4 4
4. 5. 6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Protective fuse rating Protective Class Installation Category Environment
4 7 8
8 8 8 8
Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 2/8 Safety Section
BLANK PAGE
Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Safety Section Page 3/8
1.
INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Guide also includes descriptions of equipment label markings. Documentation for equipment ordered from Schneider Electric is despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully understood by the recipient. The technical data in this safety guide is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment. Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Guide and the ratings on the equipments rating label. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced. Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who: Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected; Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it; Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices; Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information.
3.
SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.
3.1
Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal. Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or subassembly e.g. power supply.
*NOTE:
THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
3.2
Labels See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/G11) for equipment labelling information.
4.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The equipment documentation should commissioning, or servicing the equipment. be consulted before installing,
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. The clamping screws of all terminal block connectors, for field wiring, using M4 screws shall be tightened to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm. Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections shall be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Safety Section Page 5/8 To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram. Protection Class I Equipment Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost. When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm (3.3 mm for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation), CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections, Protective fuse rating, Integrity of applicable), the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided. Equipment use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 6/8 UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the equipment should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation. For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c., for example type AJT15. Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture capacity (HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or TIA. Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it. For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies. For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. Safety Section
Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Safety Section External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. *Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe. Fiber optic communication Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed. Page 7/8
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

De-commissioning The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to de-commissioning. Disposal It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
6.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1
Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. Unless otherwise stated in equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible. CAUTION CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages.
6.2
Protective Class IEC 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-27: 2006 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.
6.3
Installation Category IEC 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-27: 2006 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III): Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 s, 500 , 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.
6.4
Environment The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected). Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Altitude - Operation up to 2000m IEC 60255-27:2005 EN 60255-27: 2006 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards.
Connection Diagrams MiCOM P225
P225/EN CO/B11
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
P225/EN CO/B11 Page 1/12
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
MiCOM P225 typical connection Typical application diagram
3
3 4
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4 2.8.5 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.11.1 2.11.2
CONNECTION
Earth connection Auxiliary power Current inputs Voltage measurement input Binary inputs Output relays Front port connection (RS232) RS485 rear port Description Connection RS485 cable Protocol converter: RS232 -> K-Bus RS232 / RS485 converter Analogue outputs RTDs Thermistors PTC type thermistors NTC type thermistors
5
5 5 5 5 5 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 10 11 11
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
Alternative :The earth current input is connected to the sommation of the three phase CTs.
A B
36 6
The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT.

P2
37
A S2 S1 Auxiliary voltage S2 RL L 1
2 12 4
P2 P1
P1
B C S1 Programmable tripping output relay 1A

50 51 10 8 18 34 49
S2
S S1
+
WD Watch dog (4)
33 35
{
RL2 Programmable output relay
52 53
49
1A
MiCOM P225
50 51
1A A 1A
14 5 54 55 16
1A
{ { {
Programmable output relay Programmable output relay
52 53
1A
MiCOM P225
RL3 RL4
3 1
54 55
Connection Diagrams
1A Phase rotatio o n
56 41
C 1A
56 41
5A RL5
42 43
5A
9 7
42 43
{ {
2d 2b 2z 4d 4b 4z
Programmable output relay
5A
2d 2b 4d 4b 6d 6b
5A Thermistor1
44 45
RTD1 common RTD2 common
44 45
5A
46 47
5A
Thermistor2
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
MiCOM P225 typical connection
46 47
5A
48 39
5A
Thermistor3
If 3 thermistors option n:
6d 6b 6z 8d 8b
48
RTD3 common RTD4 Analogue output 1 active source mode

28d 28b
+ -
Voltage input
40
Alternative : Connection to 2 phase CTs + a core balanced CT.

+ 22
Case earth
1 2 29 3 30
8z
common
A
3 5 7 9 12 14 16 18 20 22 49 51 53 3 55 56 54 52 24 26 27 28 50 47 48 45 46 43 44 41 42 39 4 40 10 37 3 38 8 35 3 36 2d 4d 8d 8z 2b 4b 2z 4z 6 33 3 34 4 31 3 32
P2 input L1 Speed switch signal input L2

24 + 26
P1
Analogue g output 1
28z 28b
+
10z 12d 12b 12z
S2 Programmable input L3 Programmable input L4
S1 1
If 10 RTD option :
49
RTD6 common 2-24 Volt

14d 14b
1A
50 51
RTD7 active source mode

+ 19 + 21
1A Programmable input L5 Programmable input L6
14z 16d
common
32b
23 + 25 -
52 53
(6) If 2 analogue output option :
1A
Case earth (5)
{
Analogue output 2 passive i source mode d
32z 32b
+
16b 16z 18d 18b 18z
RTD8 common RTD9 common 2-24 Volt

20d 20b 20z
54 55
1A
56 41
RTD10 common Case earth connection
5A
42 43
Nota :
(1) (a) a (b) Short terminal break before (c) Long terminals Pins terminals (pcb type) (c) (d) (2) CT connection are typical only (3) Earth connection are typical only (4) The MICOM P220 relay is shown with power supply off
Module terminal blocks viewed from rear (with integral case earth link) CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect
5A
44 45
29 30 31
( : Link terminals 30 and 32 if the relay is connected at the end of the RS 485 bus).
5A
*
+
32
46 47
5A
RS 485 communication port
48
(5) The shielding is bonded to the earth point located next to the connector. (6) Important : the analogue output option shall be used either in active source mode or in passive source mode
Green connector
S2
10d 10b
RTD5 common
S S1
P225/EN CO/B11
Page 3/12
P0228ENa
P225/EN CO/B11 Page 4/12 1.2 Typical application diagram
Line A-Line C VT A A
Fuse
Core balanced CT CT phaseA CT phaseB
Stator temperature
Vaux
B CT phaseC B C Rotation phase C
Motor
14
Bearings temperature 52a Contactor coil

39 40 33 55 47 56 48 49 41 50 42 51 43 52 44 53 45 54 1A 46 5A
Load bearings temperature Ambient temperature
Vaux
34 22 24 11 9 7 6 4 2 12
for Programmable used start inhibition Output RL5 purpose
Communication
+ Auxiliary + Contactor A - Input L1
10 RTD's inputs (green connector)
+ + -
On Off Emergency stop
+ -
31 32
PC/PLC supervisor
Programmable tripping output relay
Auxiliary Supply Vaux
MiCOM P225
Programmabke Output RL2
Input L2 Analogue output
+ + + -
26 28 30 d/z 32 b
Klaxon Signalling lamp
10 8 5 3 1
PLC
Programmable Output RL4
Analogue output
PLC
Emergency startup
13 15
+ + + + -
Programmable Input L3 Programmable Input L4 Programmable Input L6 Programmable Input L5
37
Watchdog
35 36 18
Signalling
External reset
17 19
Thermal state value reset
25 27
Programmable Output RL3
16 14
Signalling
Fuse blown
21 23
P0231ENa
THE MiCOM P225 IS SHOWN WITH POWER SUPPLY OFF.
2.
CONNECTION
The rear face of the MiCOM P225 relay comprises at least 2 connectors. The relay may have an optional green third connector dedicated to the connection: of 10 temperature RTD sensors or 3 thermistors of 2 analogue outputs.
2.1
Earth connection The case shall be earthed according to the local standards.
2.2
Auxiliary power The auxiliary power for the MiCOM P225 relay can be either Direct (range 24 - 60 Vdc, 48150Vdc, 130-250Vdc) or Alternating (100-250Vac 50/60Hz). The range of voltage is specified on the relay indicator plate under the top flap of the front face. The power should be connected to terminals 33 and 34 only. A minimum 1.5mm wire size is recommended.
2.3
Current inputs The MiCOM P225 relay has 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth currents. The nominal value of current of these measuring inputs is either 1 Amp or 5 Amp (according to the wiring diagram). The operator can, for the same relay, mix the 1 and 5 Amp inputs (phase and earth). A minimum 2.5mm wire size is recommended.
2.4
Voltage measurement input The MiCOM P225 relay has one voltage input for phases A and C. The nominal value of that input is either comprised between 57 and 130 Volts, or between 220 and 480 Volts. A minimum 1mm wire size is recommended.
2.5
Binary inputs The MiCOM P220 relay has six opto-insulated logic inputs of which five are programmable. Each input has its own polarity and it shall be powered : with a dc voltage (relay auxiliary voltage ranges : 24-60 Vdc and 48-150 Vdc), with either a dc voltage or an ac voltage (relay auxiliary voltage range : 130-250 Vdc/100-250 Vac).
Please refer to Chapter TD Technical Specifications of this guide for more informations. The control and signalling functions to which the programmable logic inputs are assigned can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. A minimum 1mm wire size is recommended. N.B.: 2.6 Output relays Six output relays are available on the MiCOM P225 relay. Five relays are programmable, the last relay being assigned to the signalling of an equipment fault (WATCH DOG). All these relays are of the changeover type (1 common, 1 normally opened, 1 normally closed). The protection and control functions to which these relays are assigned can be selected via the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. A 52a contact (CB auxiliary contact: open when CB is opened) shall be wired to the binary input n1 (terminals 22-24).
P225/EN CO/B11 Page 6/12 2.7 Front port connection (RS232)
The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data communication (asynchronous RS232 connection according the IEC60870 requirements) and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance). The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2 Pin no. 3 Pin no. 5 Tx Rx 0V Transmit data Receive data Zero volts common
The relay should be connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): Pin no. 2 Pin no. 3 Pin no. 5 Rx Tx 0V Receive data Transmit data Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. The cable between the MiCOM relay and the PC is a standard RS232 shielded cable (male connector on the MiCOM relay side, usually female connector on PC side).
MiCOM P225 Relay
Laptop
Battery
9 pin front port Serial communication port (COM1 or COM2) Serial data connector (up to 15m)
P0232ENa
FIGURE 1 - PC<->FRONT PORT CONNECTION
Connection Diagrams MiCOM P225 2.8 2.8.1 RS485 rear port Description
The rear RS485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 31 relays can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection. 2.8.2 Connection The communication connection (port RS485) is assigned on terminals 31-32 according to the MiCOM P225 relay wiring diagram.
communication connections
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55
30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
Rear terminals
P0180ENa
FIGURE 2 - RS485 CONNECTION The total communication cable from the master unit to the farthest slave device is a spur, and no branches may be made from this spur. The maximum cable length is 1000m and the maximum number of devices per spur is 31. Polarity is not necessary for the 2 twisted wires. The transmission wires should be terminated using a 150 resistor at both extreme ends of the cable. To this effect, link terminals 30 and 32, if the relay is connected at the end of the RS485 bus, as indicated in figure 3. Terminal 29 of each MiCOM relay shall be connected to the RS485 cable shielding, as mentioned figure 3. For only one MiCOM relay connected to the RS485 bus, link terminal 29 to the case earth as indicated in figures 2 and 3.
At the extreme end of the RS485 bus, link terminals 30 and 32
For one and only MiCOM relay connected to the RS485 bus, terminal 29 is linked to the case earth
Shielding
Terminal 29 shall be connected to the RS485 cable shield
RS485 bus
2 core screened cable
Relay connected at the extreme end of the RS485 bus

P0181ENa
FIGURE 3 - RS485 CONNECTION
P225/EN CO/B11 Page 8/12 2.8.3 RS485 cable
It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or 200 nF total cable capacitance. Typical specification: 2.8.4 Each core: Nominal conductor area: Screen: Linear capacitance between conductor and earth: 16/0.2 mm copper conductors, PVC insulated 0,5 mm2 per core Overall braid, PVC sheathed 100 pF/m
Protocol converter: RS232 -> K-Bus KITZ 101,102 and 201 can be used. Configuration is: 19200 bauds, 11 bits, full duplex.
2.8.5
RS232 / RS485 converter The following RS232/RS485 converters have been tested by Schneider Electric: RS_CONV1 RS_CONV32 converter suitable for a short length and for up to 4 connected relays industrial converter, suitable for up to 31 connected relays.
2.9
Analogue outputs The MiCOM P225 relay can include two optional analogue outputs assigned on the 28d-28b28z and 32d-32b-32z terminals (green coloured connector) which allow certain data and measuring values to be reassembled on a current loop towards an automatic controller. The selections of the type of analogue outputs (options: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA) and of the type of data to be reassembled are effected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. It is recommended that a 2-core screened cable is used. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector. N.B.: The analogue outputs shall be used either in active source mode (terminals 28d-28b et 32d-32b), or in passive source mode (terminals 28z-28b et 32z-32b). This is an exclusive OR logic.
(1) If the current loop monitoring device is not earthed (floating potential), the cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector. In the other case, do not connect the cable shielding. A multi 2 core screened cable may be used (1 shielding common for all the 2 core wires).
(2)
(1) Shielding Current loop monitoring device 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA Earthing (1) Current loop monitoring device 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA Screened cable (2) Shielding 32d 32b MiCOM P225 green connector 28d 28b Case earth connector
P0233ENa
FIGURE 4 - CONNECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT IN ACTIVE SOURCE MODE
Connection Diagrams MiCOM P225 2.10 RTDs
The P225 relay can, as an option, be connected to 10 RTD's, which enables it to monitor temperature (PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2 menu). The choice of these types of RTD sensors is effected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. It is recommended that connections between the relay and the RTD's are made using a 3core screened cable with a total resistance less than 25 in case of PT100, Ni100 or Ni120 RTD. For Cu10 RTD, the cable total resistance shall be less than 2.5 . The wire also should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 Vrms. Impedance of cores connected to both terminals 2d and 2b (see figure 5) shall be of identical value. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector. Typical specification: Each core: Nominal conductor area: Screen: Conductor impedance: 7/0.2 mm copper conductors heat resistant PVC 0.22 mm2 per core Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat resistant PVC sheathed. Strictly identical for 2 of the 3 cores. Accuracy difference less than 1%
Earthing Shielding RTD1 2d 2b 2z
Case earth connector
MiCOM P225 green connector
Screened cable
P0429ENa
FIGURE 5 - RTD CONNECTION
P225/EN CO/B11 Page 10/12 2.11 Thermistors
The P225 relay can, as an option, be connected to 3 thermistors which allows it to protect against over-temperature conditions (PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2 menu). The choice between these types of thermistor is effected in the CONFIG. SELCT submenu. It is recommended that connections between the relay and the thermistors are made using a screened 2-core cable with a total resistance less than 100 . The wire also should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 Vrms. Impedance of the 2 cores shall have similar values. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector. Typical specification: Each core: Nominal conductor area: Screen: 7/0.2 mm copper conductors heat resistant PVC 0.22 mm2 per core Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat resistant PVC sheathed.
Earthing Thermistor 1 Shielding 2d 2b 2z Screened cable
Case earth connector
P0430ENa
FIGURE 6 - THERMISTOR CONNECTION
Connection Diagrams MiCOM P225 2.11.1 PTC type thermistors
For PTC type thermistor, it is usually possible to connect to the same input several thermistors in series as indicated in figure 7.
Thermistor placed on phase A winding
2d 2b Thermistor placed on phase C winding MOTOR
Thermistor input 1
4d 4b
Thermistor input 2
Thermistors placed on the motor mechanical bearings
Thermistor placed on phase B winding
LOAD 6d 6b Thermistor input 3
Thermistors placed on the driven load mechanical bearings
P0431ENa
FIGURE 7 - PTC THERMISTORS CONNECTED IN SERIES 2.11.2 NTC type thermistors For NTC type thermistors, it is recommended that only one thermistor is connected to each MiCOM relay input. Exceptionally, certain NTC type thermistors can be connected in parallel to the same input. However, we do not recommend such a connection.
BLANK PAGE
Technical Specifications MiCOM P225
P225/EN TD/B11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
P225/EN TD/B11 Page 1/34
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Thermal replica Short-circuit protection Too long start-up protection Locked rotor protection Unbalance protection Earth fault protection Under current protection Undervoltage protection Overvoltage protection
3
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11
AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
Limitation of the number of start-ups Time between 2 start-ups Anti-backspin protection Re-acceleration authorisation Presence of bus voltage prior to start-up CB failure Trip circuit supervision Auxiliary timers AND logical gates Latching of output relays CB control and monitoring
5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
Optional 2 analogue outputs Optional 10 RTD inputs Optional 3 thermistor inputs
7
7 7 7
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
RECORDING FUNCTIONS
Event recorder Fault recorder Oscillography Start-up current and voltage envelope record
8
8 8 8 8
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
COMMUNICATION
MODBUSTM communication K-bus/Courier communication IEC 60870-5-103 communication Front communication
9
9 9 9 10
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Analogue current inputs Analogue voltage input Logic inputs Output relays Auxiliary voltage
11
11 11 11 12 12
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
ACCURACY CT & VT DATA HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT ENVIRONMENT THERMAL OVERLOAD CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
13 14 15 16 17 18
EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN THE RTD IMPEDANCE MEASURED VALUE AND TEMPERATURE 32 EQUIVALENCE TABLES BETWEEN ANALOGUE OUTPUT SIGNAL VALUE AND REMOTE MEASUREMENT
14.
33
1.
1.1
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Thermal replica Thermal current threshold I> Overload time-constant Te1 Start-up time-constant Te2 Cooling time-constant Tr Negative sequence current recognition factor Ke Trip thermal threshold Thermal alarm threshold Thermal trip & alarm thresholds hysteresis Start-up inhibition 0,2 to 1,5 In by steps of 0,01 In 1 to 180 min by steps of 1min 1 to 360 min by steps of 1min 1 to 999 min by steps of 1min 0 to 10 by steps of 1 Set to 100% 20 to 100% by steps of 1% 97% 20 to 100% by steps of 1%
1.2
Short-circuit protection Current threshold I>> Time delay tI>> Operating time Drop-off time Hysteresis 0,2 to 12 In by steps of 0,1 In 0 to 100 s by steps of 0,01 s < 30 ms < 30 ms 95 %
1.3
Too long start-up protection Start-up detection criteria Current threshold Istart Time-delay tIstart (closing 52) or (closing +current threshold) optional 1 to 5 I by steps of 0,5 I 1 to 200 s by steps of 1 s 52
1.4
Locked rotor protection Current threshold Istall Hysteresis Time-delay tIstall Locked rotor at start-up detection 1 to 5 I by steps of 0,5 I 95% 0,1 to 60 s by steps of 0,1 s Yes/No
1.5
Unbalance protection Negative sequence current threshold I2> Time-delay tI2> Negative sequence current threshold I2>> IDMT time-delay Time Multiplier setting TMS I2>> Hysteresis 0,04 to 0,8 In by steps of 0,01 In 0 to 200 s by steps of 0,01 s 0,04 to 0,8 In by steps of 0,01 In t = TMS x 1,2 / (I2 / In) 0,2 to 2 by steps of 0,025 95%
P225/EN TD/B11 Page 4/34 1.6 Earth fault protection Current threshold Io>, Io>> Time-delays tIo>, tIo>> Operating time Drop-off time Hysteresis 1.7 Under current protection Current threshold I< Time-delay tI< Inhibition time at start-up Tinhib Hysteresis 1.8 Undervoltage protection Voltage threshold V< Time-delay tV< V< inhibition during start-up Hysteresis 1.9 Overvoltage protection Voltage threshold V> Time-delay tV> Hysteresis Range A Range B Range A Range B
0,002 to 1 Ion by steps of 0,001 Ion 0 to 100 s by steps of 0,01 s < 30 ms < 30 ms 95%
0,1 to 1 In by steps of 0,01 In 0,2 to 100 s by steps of 0,1 s 0,05 to 300 s by steps of 0,1 s 105%
5 to 130 V by steps of 0,1 V 20 to 480 V by steps of 0,5 V 0 to 600 s by steps of 0,01 s Yes/No 105 %
5 to 260 V by steps of 0,1 V 20 to 960 V by steps of 0,5 V 0 to 600 s by steps of 0,01 s 95 %
2.
2.1
AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
Limitation of the number of start-ups Reference period Treference Number of cold starts Number of hot starts Restart inhibition time Tinterdiction 10 to 120 min by steps of 5 min 1 to 5 by steps of 1 0 to 5 by steps of 1 1 to 120 min by steps of 1 min
2.2
Time between 2 start-ups Inhibition time Tbetw 2 start 1 to 120 min by steps of 1 min
2.3
Anti-backspin protection Restart prevention time tABS 1 to 7200 s by steps of 1 s
2.4
Re-acceleration authorisation Voltage collapse detection Voltage restoration detection Voltage collapse duration Treacc Range A Range B Range A Range B 5 to 130 V by steps of 0,1 V 20 to 480 V by steps of 0,5 V 5 to 130 V by steps of 0,1 V 20 to 480 V by steps of 0,5 V 0,1 to 10 s by steps of 0,01 s
2.5
Presence of bus voltage prior to start-up Voltage threshold Hysteresis Range A Range B 5 to 130 V by steps of 0,1 V 20 to 480 V by steps of 0,5 V 105 %
2.6
CB failure Current threshold I< BF Time-delay tBF 10 to 100% In by steps of 10% In 0,03 to 10 s by steps of 0,01 s
2.7
Trip circuit supervision Time-delay tSUP 0,1 to 10 s by steps of 0,01 s
2.8
Auxiliary timers Logic inputs with alarm message on occurrence Logic inputs without alarm message on occurrence Timers tEXT1, tEXT2, tEXT3 and tEXT4 2 external signals, EXT1 and EXT2 2 external signals, EXT3 and EXT4 0 to 200 s by steps of 0,01s
2.9
AND logical gates 4 AND gates Pick-up time delays Reset time delays 0 to 3600 s by steps of 0,1 s 0 to 3600 s by steps of 0,1 s
2.10
Latching of output relays Trip relay (RL1) Auxiliary relays (RL2, RL3, RL4 and RL5) Configurable for each trip order Configurable for each auxiliary relay
P225/EN TD/B11 Page 6/34 2.11 CB control and monitoring Close command hold Open command hold Number of operations alarm Summated contact breaking duty Adjustment of the exponent n Opening time alarm
0,2 to 5 s by steps of 0,05 s 0,2 to 5 s by steps of 0,05 s 0 to 50 000 operations by steps of 1 106 to 4 000.106 by steps of 106 1 or 2 0,05 to 1 s by steps of 0,05 s
3.
3.1
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
Optional 2 analogue outputs Rating Insulation Maximum load with active source mode Maximum voltage with passive source mode Accuracy 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA 2 kV 500 for ratings 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA 24 Volt 1% at full scale
3.2
Optional 10 RTD inputs RTD type Connection type Maximum load Insulation Thresholds Time delays Thermal image influence Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10 3 wires + 1 shielding 25 (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120) 2,5 (Cu10) 2 kV, active source mode 0 to 200 C by steps of 1 C 0 to 100 s by steps of 0,1 s Yes/No
3.3
Optional 3 thermistor inputs Thermistor type Maximum load Thresholds Time-delays PTC or NTC 100 100 to 30 000 by step of 100 Set to 2 seconds
4.
4.1
RECORDING FUNCTIONS
Event recorder Capacity Time-tag Triggers 75 events to 1 millisecond Any protection alarm & threshold Any logic input change of state Self test events Any setting change
4.2
Fault recorder Capacity Time-tag Triggers Data 5 records to 1 millisecond Any trip order (RL1 operation) Fault number Fault date & hour Active setting group Faulty phase(s) Fault type, protection threshold Fault current/voltage magnitude Phases et earth current magnitudes Line to line voltage magnitude
4.3
Oscillography Capacity Duration of each record Sampling rate Pre-time setting Post-time setting Triggers 5 records 2,5 s 32 samples per frequency cycle 0,1 to 2,5 s by steps of 0,1 s 0,1 to 2,5 s by steps of 0,1 s Any protection threshold overreach or any trip order (RL1 relay operation) logic input Remote command 4 analogue current channels (3 + N) 1 analogue voltage channel Logic input and output states Frequency value
Data
4.4
Start-up current and voltage envelope record Capacity Maximum duration Sampling rate Data Current Voltage 1 record 200 s 1 sample each 5 frequency cycles True RMS value, maximum value of one of the 3 phase currents True RMS value
5.
5.1
COMMUNICATION
MODBUSTM communication Mode Transmission mode Interface Data rate Relay address Parity Date format Connection Cable Maximum cable length Connector Insulation RTU (standard) Synchronous RS 485, 2 wires + shielding 300 to 38 (programmable) 1 to 255 Settable IEC format or Private format Multi-point (32 connections) Half-duplex (screened twisted wire pair) 1000 meters Connector screws or snap-on 2 kV RMS 400 bauds
5.2
K-bus/Courier communication Transmission mode Interface Data rate Relay address Connection Cable Maximum cable length Connector Insulation Synchronous K-bus/RS485, 2 wires + shielding 64000 bauds 1 to 254 Multi-point (32 connections) Half-duplex (screened twisted wire pair) 1000 meters Connector screws or snap-on 2 kV RMS
5.3
IEC 60870-5-103 communication Transmission mode Interface Data rate Relay address Parity Connection Cable Maximum cable length Connector Insulation Synchronous RS 485, 2 wires + shielding 9600 to 19200 bauds (programmable) 1 to 254 Even Multi-point (32 connections) Half-duplex (screened twisted wire pair) 1000 meters Connector screws or snap-on 2 kV RMS
P225/EN TD/B11 Page 10/34 5.4 Front communication Interface Protocol Data rate Parity Stop bit Data bits Connector Cable type RS232
MODBUSTM RTU 19200 bauds Without 1 8 Sub-D 9 pin female connector Screened twisted wire cable, nocrossed
6.
6.1
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Analogue current inputs Phase currents In Earth current Ion Frequency Burdens Range Nominal Phase current inputs Earth current input Thermal withstand of both phase and earth current inputs 1 and 5 Ampere 1 and 5 Ampere 45 to 65 Hz 50/60 Hz < 0.3 VA @ In (5A) < 0,025 VA @ In (1A) < 0.01 VA @ 0.1Ion (5A) < 0,004 VA @ 0,1 Ion (1A) 100 In 1 s 40 In 2 s 4 In continuous
6.2
Analogue voltage input Phase A Phase C voltage input : Vn Frequency Burden Thermal withstand Range A Range B Range Nominal 57-130 Volt (range A) 220-480 Volt (range B) 45 to 65 Hz 50/60 Hz < 0,1 VA @ Vn 260 V continuous 300 V 10 s 960 V continuous 1300 V 10 s
6.3
Logic inputs Type Number Burden Recognition time Independent optical isolated 6 (5 programmable, 1 fixe) < 10 mA for each input 5 ms with Vdc 7,5 ms with Vac
THE LOGIC INPUTS SHALL BE POWERED WITH A DC VOLTAGE, EXCEPTED THE M AUXILIARY VOLTAGE RANGE WHICH ACCEPTS BOTH DC AND AC VOLTAGE AS LOGIC INPUT CONTROL VOLTAGE. Logic input operation Cortec Code A F M Relay auxiliary voltage range 24 60 Vdc 48 150 Vdc 130 250 Vdc 100 250 Vac Auxiliary voltage range for the logic inputs * 19 60 Vdc 32 150 Vdc 48 250 Vdc 48 250 Vac Minimum voltage Minimum current level (Volt) level (milli-Amp) 15 Vdc 25 Vdc 38 Vdc 38 Vac 3,35 mA 3,35 mA 2,20 mA
* The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations for the logic inputs is 20%.
P225/EN TD/B11 Page 12/34 6.4 Output relays Type Number Commutation capacity Make Carry continuously Break
Dry contact AgCdO, changeover type 6 (5 programmable, 1 watchdog) 30 Amps for 3 s 5 Amps 135 Vdc, 0,3 A (L/R=30 ms) 250 Vdc, 50 W resistive 250 Vdc, 25 W inductive(L/R =40 ms) 220 Vac, 5 A (50/60 Hz - cos=0,6) < 7 ms > 100 000 operations
Operation time Durability 6.5 Auxiliary voltage 3 ranges : Vaux
2460 Vdc 48150 Vdc 130250 Vdc /100-250 Vac -20% / +20% 12 % > 50 ms <3 W standby + 0.25 for each output relay energized in Vdc < 6 VA in Vac
Variations Residual peak to peak ripple Power off withstand Burden
7.
ACCURACY
Protection thresholds Time delays Measurements Current Voltage Power Temperature Pass band for measurements of true RMS values 2% 2 % with a minimum of 10ms Typical 0,2 % @ In Typical 0,2 % @ Vn Typical 1 % @ Pn 2 C 500Hz
8.
CT & VT DATA
Phase CTs primary Earth CT primary Phase CTs secondary Earth CT secondary Recommended phase CTs Recommended earth CT 1 to 3000 by steps of 1 1 to 3000 by steps of 1 1 or 5 1 or 5 5P10 - 5VA (typical) Residual connection or core balanced CT (prefered in isolated neutral systems) 1 to 20 000 V by steps of 1 V Range A Range B 57 to 130 V by steps of 0,1 V 220 to 480 V by steps of 1 V
VT primary VT secondary
9.
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand (50/60Hz) IEC 60255-5 BS 142 ANSI C37.90 IEC 60255-5 BS 142 IEC 60255-5 2 kV in common mode 1 kV in differential mode 5 kV in common mode 1 kV in differential mode > 100 M
Impulse voltage (1,2/50 s) Insulation resistance
10.
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
High frequency disturbance Fast transient disturbance Electrostatic discharge Radio frequency impulse IEC 611000-4-1 IEC 611000-4-4 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 611000-4-2 ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 611000-4-3 2.5 kV in common mode, class 3 1 kV in differential mode, class 3 4 kV auxiliary supply, class 4 2 kV other, class 4 8 kV, class 4 35 V/m 10 V/m
11.
ENVIRONMENT
Temperature IEC 60255-6 Storage and transportation Operation IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60529 IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3 - 40C to + 70C - 25C to + 55 C 56 days at 93% RH and 40C IP 52, IK 07 Response and endurance, class 2 Response and withstand, class 1 Class 2
Humidity Enclosure protection Vibration Shock and bump Seismic withstand
12.
THERMAL OVERLOAD CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
Thermal overload characteristic curves Thermal constant times :

- overload condition : T e1 = 12 minutes - start-up condition : T
10 000 e2
= 6 minutes
1 000
Cold curve Thermal status = 0 %
Operating time (seconds)
100
10
Hot curve Thermal status = 90%
0 0.1
Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current thermal threshold I >
10
P0159ENa
Thermal overload characteristic curves Cold curves Initial thermal state of 0%

100 000
10 000
Te1 = Te2 = 60 mn Te1 = Te2 = 54 mn

1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 48 mn Te1 = Te2 = 42 mn Te1 = Te2 = 36 mn
100
10
Te1 = Te2 = 30 mn Te1 = Te2 =24 mn Te1 = Te2 = 18 mn
0 1
10
P0160ENa
Thermal overload characteristic curve Cold curves Initial thermal state of 0%

100 000
10 000
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 44 mn Te1 = Te2 = 38 mn

100
Te1 = Te2 = 32 mn
10
Te1 = Te2 =26 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 20 mn Te1 = Te2 = 14 mn

1
Te1 = Te2 = 8 mn Te1 = Te2 = 2 mn
0 1 10
Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the current thermal threshold I q >
P0161ENa
Thermal overload characteristic curves Cold curves Initial thermal state of 0%

100 000
10 000
Te1 = Te2 = 64 mn Te1 = Te2 = 58 mn

1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 52 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 46 mn Te1 = Te2 = 40 mn

100
Te1 = Te2 =34 mn

10
Te1 = Te2 =28 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 22 mn Te1 = Te2 = 16 mn

1
Te1 = Te2 = 10 mn Te1 = Te2 = 4 mn
0 1
Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the current thermal threshold I >
10
P0162ENa
Thermal overload characteristic curves Hot curves Initial thermal state of 90%
100 000
10 000
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 60 mn Te1 = Te2 = 54 mn

100
10
Te1 = Te2 = 30 mn
1
Te1 = Te2 =24 mn Te1 = Te2 = 18 mn Te1 = Te2 = 12 mn Te1 = Te2 = 6 mn Te1 = Te2 = 1 mn
0 1
10
P0163ENa
100 000
10 000
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 62 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 56 mn
100
Te1 = Te2 = 50 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 44 mn Te1 = Te2 = 38 mn

10
Te1 = Te2 = 32 mn Te1 = Te2 =26 mn

1
Te1 = Te2 = 20 mn Te1 = Te2 = 14 mn Te1 = Te2 = 8 mn Te1 = Te2 = 2 mn
0 1 10
Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current thermal threshold >
P0164ENa
100 000
10 000
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 64 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 58 mn Te1 = Te2 = 52 mn

100
Te1 = Te2 = 46 mn Te1 = Te2 = 40 mn
10
Te1 = Te2 =34 mn Te1 = Te2 =28 mn Te1 = Te2 = 22 mn

1

0 1
10
P0165ENa
Technical Specifications Page 25/34
P225/EN TD/B11
MiCOM P225
Cooling down thermal curves Initial thermal state of 90%
100
90
80
Tr = 96 mn
70
Tr = 84 mn
60
Tr = 72 mn
50
Tr = 60 mn Tr = 48 mn Tr = 36 mn
Thermal state (en %)
40
30
20
Tr = 24 mn
10
Tr = 12 mn
Tr = 5 mn
0 100
Operating time (minutes)
P0221ENa
P225/EN TD/B11 MiCOM P225
Technical Specifications
Page 26/34
100
90
80
Tr = 204 mn Tr = 192 mn Tr = 180 mn
70
60
Tr = 168 mn
50
40
Tr = 156 mn
30
Tr = 144 mn Tr = 132 mn
20
Tr = 120 mn Tr = 108 mn
10
0 100
200
P0222ENa
P225/EN TD/B11
MiCOM P225
100
90
80
Tr = 450 mn Tr = 425 mn Tr = 400 mn Tr = 375 mn
70
60
50
Tr = 350 mn Tr = 325 mn
40
30
Tr = 300 mn Tr = 275 mn
20
10
Tr = 250 mn Tr = 225 mn
0 200 300 400

100
500
600
P0223ENa
Page 28/34
100
90
80
Tr = 96 mn
70
Tr = 84 mn Tr = 72 mn
60
50
Tr = 60 mn
Thermal state (%)
Tr = 48 mn Tr = 36 mn
40
30
20
Tr = 24 mn
10
Tr = 12 mn
Tr = 5 mn
0
100
P0224ENa
P225/EN TD/B11
MiCOM P225
100
90
80
Tr = 204 mn Tr = 192 mn
70
Tr = 180 mn Tr = 168 mn
60
Thermal state (%)
50
Tr = 156 mn
40
Tr = 144 mn Tr = 132 mn
30
20
Tr = 120 mn
10
Tr = 108 mn
0 100
200
300
P0225ENa
Page 30/34
100
90
Tr = 450 mn
80
Tr = 425 mn Tr = 400 mn
70
60
Tr = 375 mn Tr = 350 mn
Thermal state (%)
50
40
Tr = 325 mn
30
Tr = 300 mn Tr = 275 mn
20
10
Tr = 250 mn Tr = 225 mn
0 200 300 400
100
500
600
P0226ENa
Negative phase sequence protection Inverse time characteristic curve I2>> element
100,0
I2>> setting range from 0,04 to 0,8 In
10,0
TMS = 2
1,0 TMS = 1
TMS = 0,2
0,1 0,01 0,1 1 10
Ratio "Negative phase sequence current/rated current" : I2 / In

P0338ENa
13.
EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN THE RTD IMPEDANCE MEASURED VALUE AND TEMPERATURE
Temperature (C) -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 100 OHM Platinum () 84.27 88.22 92.16 96.09 100.0 103.9 107.8 111.7 115.5 119.4 123.2 127.1 130.9 134.7 138.5 142.3 146.1 149.8 153.6 157.3 161.0 164.8 168.5 172.2 175.8 100 OHM Nickel () 79.13 84.15 89.23 94.58 100.0 105.6 111.2 117.1 123.0 129.1 135.3 141.7 148.3 154.9 161.8 168.8 176.0 183.3 190.9 198.7 206.6 214.8 223.2 231.6 240.0 120 OHM Nickel () 92.76 99.41 106.41 113.0 120.0 127.2 134.5 142.1 149.8 157.7 165.9 174.3 182.8 191.6 200.6 209.9 219.3 228.9 238.8 249.0 259.3 269.9 280.8 291.9 303.5 10 OHM Copper () 7.490 7.876 8.263 8.649 9.035 9.421 9.807 10.19 10.58 10.97 11.35 11.74 12.12 12.51 12.90 13.28 13.67 14.06 14.44 14.83 15.22 15.61 16.00 16.38 16.78
14.
EQUIVALENCE TABLES BETWEEN ANALOGUE OUTPUT SIGNAL VALUE AND REMOTE MEASUREMENT
The hereafter tables provide equivalence data between the current signal issued from the analogue outputs of the MiCOM P225 and the measurement value : Rating 0 20 mA :
Measurement type Phase A current Phase B current Phase C current Earth current Motor thermal state
HMI sign IA RMS IB RMS IC RMS IN RMS THERM ST
Unit
Variation range
Rating 0 - 20 mA Ias * 2 In / 20 mA Ias * 2 In / 20 mA Ias * 2 In / 20 mA Ias * 2 In / 20 mA Ias * 150 / 20 mA Ias * 150 / 20 mA Ias * 120 / 20 mA Ias * 120 / 20 mA Ias * 130 / 20 mA Ias * 480 / 20 mA Ias * 2 / 20 mA - 1 Ias * 2 * MVA / 20 mA - MVA Ias * 2 * MVA / 20 mA - MVA Ias * 255 / 20 mA 40C Ias * 10 / 20 mA
Ampere 0 to 2 In Ampere 0 to 2 In Ampere 0 to 2 In Ampere 0 to 2 In % % Minute Minute Volt Volt 0 to 150 % 0 to 150 % 0 to 120 Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes 0 to 130 V 0 to 480 V -1 to 1 W VAR C - MVA to MVA - MVA to MVA - 40 to 215 C 1 to 10
Load in % of the full load current % I LOAD Time before a permitted start Time before a thermal trip Phase A phase C voltage (range 57- 130 V) Phase A phase C voltage (range 220 - 480 V) Power factor Active power (WATT) Ractive power (VAR) RTDs temperature Hottest RTD number TbefSTART TbefTRIP VAC RMS VAC RMS POWER FACT WATTs VARs TC RTD No Hottest RTD
P225/EN TD/B11 Page 34/34 Rating 4 - 20 mA : Measurement type Phase A current Phase B current Phase C current Earth current Motor thermal state Load in % of the full load current HMI sign IA RMS IB RMS IC RMS IN RMS THERM ST % I LOAD Unit Variation range
Rating 4 - 20 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA
Ampere 0 to 2 In Ampere 0 to 2 In Ampere 0 to 2 In Ampere 0 to 2 In % % Minute Minute Volt Volt
0 to 150 % (Ias 4 mA) * 150 / 16 mA 0 to 150 % (Ias 4 mA) * 150 / 16 mA 0 to 120 Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes 0 to 130 V 0 to 480 V -1 to 1 (Ias 4 mA) * 120 / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 120 / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 130 / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 480 / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 2 / 16 mA - 1
(Ias 4 mA) * 2 * MVA / 16 mA MVA (Ias 4 mA) * 2 * MVA / 16 mA MVA
Time before a permitted start TbefSTART Time before a thermal trip Phase A phase C voltage (range 57- 130 V) Phase A phase C voltage (range 220 - 480 V) Power factor Active power (WATT) Ractive power (VAR) RTDs temperature Hottest RTD number N.B. : TbefTRIP VAC RMS VAC RMS POWER FACT WATTs VARs TC RTD No Hottest RTD
W VAR C
- MVA to MVA - MVA to MVA
- 40 to 215 (Ias 4 mA) * 255 / 16 mA 40C C 1 to 10 (Ias 4 mA) * 10 / 16 mA
Ias is the value of the current signal generated by the analogue output. In the case where the measurement value to remote through the analogue output is outside the permissible variation range, the current signal is restricted to the limit value of the variation range. In the case where there is no thermal alarm ALARM , the current signal value meaning the time before a thermal trip Tbef TRIP is equal to 20 mA. MVA : Maximum rating of the power value transmitted by the analogue output (MAX VALUE ANALOG setting within the CONFIG. SELECT submenu).
User Guide MiCOM P225
P225/EN FT/B11
USER GUIDE
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 1/52
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
INTRODUCTION
Object of this document Definitions
3
3 3
2. 3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4
DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P225 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY THE OPERATOR INTERFACE
Description of the front panel The LEDs The keypad ALARM keys Programming keypad Liquid crystal display screen
4 6
6 6 7 7 7 7
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.4 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 4.10.5 4.10.6 4.10.7
THE MENUS
Default display Access to the menus Access to the setting parameters Protection by password Entering the password/modification of the parameters The OP. PARAMETERS MENU The CONFIGURATION menu The CONFIG. SELECT submenu The CT/VT RATIO submenu The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus The ALARM CONFIG. submenu The INPUT CONFIG. sub-menu The MEASUREMENTS1 and MEASUREMENT2 menus The PROCESS menu The TRIP STATISTICS menu The COMMUNICATION menu The PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus
8
8 8 8 9 9 10 11 11 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 17 18
The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu: Protection against thermal overload conditions19 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu The [46] UNBALANCE submenu The [27]UNDERVOLTAGE submenu: Undervoltage protection The [59] OVERVOLTAGE sub-menu: Overvoltage protection The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu: Protection against excessively long starts 23 23 24 24 25 25
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 2/52 4.10.8 4.10.9 The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu
User Guide MiCOM P225 26
The [37]LOSS OF LOAD submenu: Protection against undercurrent/loss of load conditions27 28 28 29 29 31 32 35 37 38 40 40 40 41 41 44 44 45 47 47 48 49 49 49 50
4.10.10 The [49/38] RTD submenu: Temperature protection by RTD (optional) 4.10.11 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu: Temperature protection by thermistor (optional) 4.11 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.3 4.11.4 4.11.5 4.11.6 4.11.7 4.11.8 4.11.9 The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu The [66] START NUMBER submenu : Limitation of the number of starts per period The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu: Minimum time between two starts The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu: Re-acceleration/load shedding authorisation Binary inputs The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu: Programmable AND logic gates The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY: AND logic gate time delay The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : Auxiliary programmable output relays The LATCH AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : Latching of the output relays The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu: Configuration of the trip output relay
4.11.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu: Latching of the trip output relay 4.11.11 The CB FAIL sub-menu: Breaker failure protection 4.11.12 The ABS sub-menu: Minimum time between a stop and a start 4.11.13 VOLTAGE CHECK sub-menu: Validation of voltage presence before a start 4.11.14 The CB SUPERVISION submenu: Circuit-breaker supervision 4.12 4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3 4.13 4.13.1 4.13.2 The RECORD menu The FAULT RECORD submenu The DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu The CB MONITORING submenu display of the values related to the cut-off device ALARM messages The ALARM menu The HARDWARE ALARM messages
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Event records Recording of the form of the starting current and voltage Standard remote control via the RS485 communications port Block start via the RS485 communications port
51
51 51 51 51
6.
6.1 6.2
PC CONNECTION LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS

Connection configuration Configuration of the relay and PC
52
52 52
1.
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Object of this document The purpose of this document is to present the characteristics of the P225 motor protection relay and to guide the operator through the setting procedures. After an overview of the product, this manual explains the functions performed by this protection relay and how they must be used. The menu associated with each of these functions is presented and explained.
1.2
Definitions Tripping This operation consists of a command to open the breaking device (circuit breaker or fuse contactor) connected to the motor. A tripping command can be given: either on detection of a fault by the MiCOM P225 relay, or by the operator (in this case it is an external tripping command). Alarm The detection of a fault by the MiCOM P225 relay leads to the display of an alarm message. Acknowledgement of an alarm This operation consists of making an alarm message disappear. Function in service/out of service The MiCOM P225 relay offers a certain number of protection, monitoring and control functions. The operator can select from these functions the ones he wishes to use: he must bring into service the functions he chooses to use, he can take out of service the functions he does not wish to use. Activated/deactivated function Not all the protection functions of the P225 relay are activated at the same time. They are alternately activated/deactivated automatically by the P225 relay itself to ensure that the motor has protection specific to its various operating conditions: underload or overload conditions, starting phase, locked rotor condition, and motor shut down. N.B.: A function cannot be activated or deactivated unless the operator has previously brought it into service.
2.
DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P225 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY

The MiCOM P225 relay uses digital techniques to fulfil the functions of protection, control and monitoring of motors. It is equipped with 5 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs, 1 earth current input and 1 phase-phase voltage input). The current inputs have dual ratings of 1 or 5 amperes (it is possible to combine an earth current rating of 1 A and a phase current rating of 5 A), the voltage input's rating is either 57-130V or 220-480V. It is possible to program the output relays to respond to any of the protection or control functions available. The different logic inputs can also be allocated to control functions. The auxiliary power supply is provided by a direct current or alternating current auxiliary source via an internal converter. Satisfactory operation of the P225 relay is guaranteed during brief interruptions of the auxiliary power supply lasting less than 50 ms. The front panel gives the operator access to the data of the MiCOM P225 relay either via LEDs or via the display unit and the keypad. The various alarms are stored in the memory and made available to the operator on the backlit display device. These alarms can be read and acknowledged directly without a password. All the parameters and measurements are accessible without a password. The setting values can only be modified after entering the password stored in the memory. The MiCOM P225 relay records and measures a large number of data with very great accuracy. It continuously measures the phase and earth currents and the phase-phase voltage taking into account the true RMS values up to the 10th harmonic for a 50 Hz motor and the 8th harmonic for a 60 Hz motor. The MiCOM P225 relay has on the rear connector a RS485 type link with a choice of MODBUS, RTU mode, Courier or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocols. This enables the operator to read the data stored by the relay (measurements, alarms, parameters), or modify the different settings and allocations of outputs of each relay, or transmit remote orders. It is also possible to reassemble or modify these data via the RS232 communication located on the front panel by using the MiCOM S1 support software. The MiCOM P225 relay can be connected directly via this link to a digital monitoring and control system (for example: MiCOM S10, SCADA). All the data available are then at the disposal of the supervisor and can be utilised either locally or remotely.
The MiCOM P225 relay can be withdrawn while it is live. This means that its live parts can be withdrawn from the metal housing while the relay is supplied with power via the auxiliary source. When the relay is drawn out of its housing: the current circuits from the phase and earth CTs are not interrupted thanks to the presence of internal short-circuiting devices located at the current inputs (metal housing part), no tripping order is generated, the watchdog relay drops out, the RS485 link is not interrupted. However, communication is no longer possible for the relay which is drawn out.
REMOTE COMMUNICATION parameterisation, measurements, control MMI LCD display device 8 LEDs for indication 7 pushbuttons RS232 port
MOTOR
PROTECTION + measurements, automatic controls, monitoring, disturbance recording
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM phase currents earth current
CONTRACTOR/ CIRCUIT BREAKER Status (closed, open) tripping/closing commande
MCC MOTOR CONTROL

P0190ENa
FIGURE 1 - ENVIRONMENT OF THE MiCOM P225 RELAY
3.
3.1
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE

Description of the front panel The front panel of the MiCOM P225 relay serves as an interface between the human and the protection relay. It enables the operator to enter settings, to gain access to the display of measured values and alarms, and also to display in a simple manner the different actions performed by the MiCOM P225 relay.
Backlit display device 2 x 16 characters
Upper flaps
MiCOM
SERIAL No. DIAGRAM No. MICOM P121 Vn - V 50/60 Hz
P225
IA RMS = 74.A
2 touch-sensitive buttons to read and acknowledge alarm messages
Trip LED Alarm LED Warning LED Power LED Programmable LEDs Location for backup battery
Dle h c n c Alarme Da tf u ip u q
C
Parameterisation and setting keypad
Alim. Aux. Dec . 1 Dec . 2 Dec . 3 Dec . 4
RS232 port Lower flaps
P0234ENa
FIGURE 2 - FRONT PANEL OF THE MiCOM P225 RELAY Under the upper flap, there is a label identifying the relay by its model number and serial number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically. When requesting any information from the factory, do not forget to indicate these two numbers. The auxiliary power supply range of the relay is also indicated on the lower part of the label. Under the lower flap, the RS232 link permits the connection of a portable PC to the MiCOM P225 relay. The live part can be withdrawn from the housing by opening the two flaps and applying traction to the two notches located behind these flaps. 3.2 The LEDs The LEDs are numbered from 1 to 8 starting from the top. N.B.: LED 1 The LEDs are turned off when the auxiliary power supply is lost. When the power supply is back the state of the LEDs is restored. Colour: RED Wording: TRIP
The LED indicates that the relay has transmitted a tripping order to the breaking device (fuse-contactor/circuit breaker). This LED copies the tripping command sent to logic output No. 1 (tripping relay). Its normal state is extinguished. It lights up as soon as a tripping command is issued. It is extinguished when the associated alarm is acknowledged (disappearance of the fault and acknowledgement by the operator). LED 2 Colour: YELLOW Wording: ALARM
This LED indicates that a motor alarm has been taken into account by the MiCOM P225 relay. The management of the ALARM LED is directly linked to the status of the motor alarms in the memory (MOTOR ALARM menu).
If one or more messages are not read and not acknowledged, the ALARM LED flashes. If all messages are read but not acknowledged, the ALARM LED shows a steady light. If all messages have been read and acknowledged, the ALARM LED is extinguished. LED 3 Colour: YELLOW Wording: WARNING
This LED indicates equipment faults of the MiCOM P225 relay. The management of the WARNING LED is directly linked to the status of the equipment alarms in the memory (HARDW ALARMS menu). When a minor internal alarm (minor equipment fault, typically a communication failure) is detected, the WARNING LED flashes. When the fault is classed as serious, (major equipment failure) the WARNING LED is lit. The WARNING LED can only be extinguished when the cause which produced the alarm has disappeared (repair of the module, disappearance of the fault). LED 4 Colour: GREEN Wording: HEALTHY
This LED indicates that the MiCOM P225 relay is energised within the rated range (0.8 to 1.2 Vaux). LEDs 5 to 8: Colour: RED
These LEDs can be programmed by the operator in the CONFIGURATION menu. 3.3 The keypad The keypad has seven keys arranged in two groups: The two keys located immediately below the screen (keys ! and "), The five keys positioned in the centre of the front panel for programming. 3.3.1 ALARM keys The two keys ! and " are dedicated to reading and acknowledgement of the alarms respectively. To display the successive alarms, press the ! key. The alarms are arranged in the order in which they were detected (the most recent last, the oldest first). To acknowledge the alarms, the operator can either acknowledge each alarm by pressing the " key, or go to the end of the MOTOR ALARMS menu and perform a general acknowledgement. 3.3.2 Programming keypad The five keys situated in the centre of the front panel of the MiCOM P225 relay are dedicated to programming The keys # $ % & make it possible to move in the direction indicated in the different levels of the menus. The ' key permits the confirmation of a choice or a value (modification of parameters). 3.4 Liquid crystal display screen The liquid crystal display screen has two lines each with sixteen characters. The screen lights up as soon as a key on the keypad is activated. It remains lit up for 5 minutes after a key on the keypad was last used. The screen has backlighting which makes it easy to read, regardless of the ambient lighting conditions.
4.
THE MENUS
The menu of the P225 relay is organised into main menus, some of which are subdivided into submenus (figure 3). The operator dialogue of the MiCOM P225 relay is divided into 10 menus ( menu column)
Menus
OP. PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS 1 MEASUREMENTS 2 PROCESS TRIP STATISTICS COMMUNICATION PROTECTION G1
Sub-menus
CONFIG. SELECT CT/VT RATIO LED5 LED6 LED7 LED8 ALARM CONFIG. INPUT CONFIG.
[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD
[50/-51] SHORTCIRCUIT
[50N/-51N] EARTH FAULT
[46] UNBALANCE
[27] [59] [48] EXCES. UNDERVOLT OVERVOLTA LONG START AGE GE [27] [59] [48] EXCES. UNDERVOLT OVERVOLTA LONG START AGE GE AND LOGIC EQUATION AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY AUX OUTPUT RLY
[51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR
[37] LOSS [49/38] OF LOAD RTD
[49] THERMISTOR
PROTECTION G2
[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD
[50/-51] SHORTCIRCUIT
[50N/-51N] EARTH FAULT
[46] UNBALANCE
[51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR
[37] LOSS [49/38] OF LOAD RTD
[49] THERMISTOR
AUTOMAT. CTRL
[66] START NUMBER
MIN TIME BETW REACCELERATION INPUTS 2 START AUTHORIZ
LATCH AUX RLY
TRIP OUTPUT RLY
LATCH TRIP ORDER
CB FAIL
ABS
BUS VOLTAGE CTRL DISTURB RECORD
CB SUPERVISION
RECORD
FAULT RECORD
CB MONITORING
FIGURE 3 - ORGANISATION OF THE MENUS OF THE MiCOM P225 RELAY. From the default display, access is gained to these different menus by using the # and $ keys. To return to the default display from any one of the menus, press the $ key. 4.1 Default display By default, a value is continuously displayed, and the operator can select this value from a list in the CONFIG. As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM P225 relay, the relay indicates it by an alarm message: this display takes priority and replaces the default value (see the MOTOR ALARMS and HARDW ALARMS menus). 4.2 Access to the menus Access is gained to the different menus via the # and $ keys. It is possible to read all the parameters and measurements without the password. The parameters can only be modified after entering the password. 4.3 Access to the setting parameters Access to the setting parameters of the MiCOM P225 relay is possible in different ways: either locally: by using the keys or the RS232 port on the front panel, or remotely: via the RS485 port at the rear.
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.3.1 Protection by password
Modification of the relay parameters via the pushbuttons on the front panel is protected by password. This protection applies to the relay configuration settings, particularly the selection of the different thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of the binary inputs, logic gates and output relays. The password consists of four alphanumerical characters in capitals. On leaving the factory, the password is AAAA. The operator can define his own combination of characters. If the password is lost or forgotten, modification of the parameters stored in the memory of the relay is inhibited. All that is required then is to contact Schneider Electric or its agent, stating the serial number of the relay, to receive an emergency password specific to the relay concerned. 4.3.2 Entering the password/modification of the parameters To modify a parameter, first press the key to go into updating mode (or parameterisation mode). The operator is asked to enter the password as soon as a parameter is modified in any of the menus or submenus. So when the operator presses the key, to make an adjustment, and the password is not active, the following display appears on the screen: ENTER PASSWORD AAAA The password consists of the letters between A and Z. The password is entered letter by letter by using the and keys to move forwards and backwards in the alphabet. After each letter, press the key to enter the next letter. At the end of the input press the key to confirm the password. If the password is correct the message PASSWORD OK appears on the screen. After 2 seconds, the display returns to the previous point in the menu. Press the key again. A cursor appears on the first field of the data to be updated: Example modification of the current threshold I >> ([50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu) I>> THRESHOLD = 1.0 In A flashing cursor indicates that the operator can change the value in the cell. To scroll through the possible values for a cell, use the and keys.
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 10/52 After each value, press the & key to enter the next digit. At the end of the input, press the ' key to confirm the modification.
While the relay is in setting mode, the letter P (Parameter) is displayed at the bottom right of the menus and submenus headers. Example the letter P is displayed in the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu header: [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT P If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is deactivated and the letter P disappears. Any subsequent modification of parameters will give rise to a further request for the password. N.B.: The parameterisation mode only allows modification of the relay configuration via the interface through which is was activated: if for example the password was entered by the keys on the front panel, only modifications carried out using these keys will be accepted. When the parameterisation mode is activated by entering the password via the front panel (pushbuttons), as long as this mode of parameterisation remains active, it is no longer possible to modify the relay parameters via the RS485 or RS232 communication ports. The parameters of the P225 relay can only be modified by using the pushbuttons. Once the parameterisation mode is deactivated (no action on any pushbutton for 5 minutes), it is then possible to modify the parameters of the P225 relay by using one of the communication ports. Pressing the " key during modification makes it possible to return to the value before modification. To modify the active password, gain access to the OP. PARAMETERS menu then to the PASSWORD point in the menu.
4.4
The OP. PARAMETERS MENU In this menu, the operator has access to the following information: the type of MiCOM relay, here it is the model P225 the software version of the relay the active setting group the state of all the logic inputs the state of the programmable output relays
In this menu, the operator can also: modify the password give the relay/motor feeder a reference (4 characters, letters or figures) indicate the rated frequency of the motor (50 or 60 Hz) modify the date and time.
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.5 The CONFIGURATION menu
The CONFIGURATION menu makes it possible to configure the MiCOM P225 relay. This menu is divided into 8 submenus: 4.5.1 4.5.1.1 CONFIG. SELECT CT/VT RATIO LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 ALARM CONFIG. INPUT CONFIG.
The CONFIG. SELECT submenu Setting group The MiCOM P225 relay has two configuration groups corresponding to two protection groups (menus PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2). The operator can thus carry out 2 settings for each parameter: one for configuration group 1 and the other for configuration group 2. Management of the active setting group can be performed either on a transition or depending on a level. This selection is done by selecting in the "SET GRP CHANGE INPUT" cell: 1. either PICK UP or LEVEL
If PICK UP is selected, the setting group switch can be controlled by: a local command: via a logic input which must have been previously configured by the operator, via the keys on the front panel via the RS232 port on the front panel.
a remote command via the RS485 port at the rear. N.B.: The default configuration group is PROTECTION G1. The list of access methods above is given in the order of priority: for example the configuration changeover order given by a logic input takes priority over the one given by the keys on the front panel.
2.
If LEVEL is selected, the active setting group depends on the state of the logic input configured as "SET GROUP" Logic input in low state: PROTECTION G1 group active Logic input in high state: PROTECTION G2 group active N.B.: If no logic input is configured as "SET GROUP", PROTECTION G1 is the default active group
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 12/52 4.5.1.2 Selection of a default value to be display
The operator can select the measured value permanently displayed on the LCD screen from the following list: 4.5.1.3 one of the 3 phase currents IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS, the neutral current IN RMS, the thermal state of the motor THERM ST, the current value consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal current threshold value I > (sub-menu [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD): I% LOAD the waiting time before a start is permitted: T bef Start, the time before a thermal trip occurs: T bef Trip, the phase-phase voltage VAC RMS the power factor: "POWER FACT", the absorbed active power: "WATTs", the absorbed reactive power: "VARs".
Motor start-up/Motor halted detection criteria The MiCOM P225 relay offers the choice of start detection criteria as follows: closure of the contactor/circuit breaker: criterion listed as 52A, closure of the contactor/circuit breaker and overshoot of the starting current threshold Istart ([48] EXCES. LONG START submenu). These two events must appear within an interval of time of approximately 90 ms for the detection of a start to be accepted. This criterion is known as 52A + I.
This facility makes it possible to adapt the configuration of the P225 relay to the type of starting used: direct on_line or soft start. The relay will consider the motor stopped upon drop-off of logic input L1 (logic state 0). N.B.: The P225 relay detects the information "contactor/circuit breaker position" via logic input L1 (paragraph .4.11.4.1. "Fixed" inputs). The connection of this logic input to the status of the breaking device is obligatory.
4.5.1.4
Analogue outputs (optional) The MiCOM P225 relay offers 2 optional analogue outputs to make the data available to a logic controller, at 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA as desired. The current loop support can be used as an active source circuit or a passive source circuit. The values which can be transmitted by these analogue outputs are: one of the 3 phase currents: IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS the neutral current: IN RMS, the voltage between phases A and C: VAC RMS the power factor: POWER FACT the active power: WATTs the reactive power: VARs the motor's thermal state: THERM ST, the current absorbed by the motor, in percentage of the I> thermal current threshold: %I LOAD,
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 13/52 the waiting time before another start is permitted: T bef Start, the time before a thermal trip occurs: T bef Trip, one of the temperatures measured by the RTD (optional): TC RTD1, TC RTD2, TC RTD3, TC RTD4, TC RTD5, TC RTD6, RTD10, indication of the hottest RTD: No HOTTEST RTD
When an analogue output is configure to indicate the active or reactive power, a cell is displayed. It is used to set the maximum rating of the analogue output. The table of correspondence of the analogue outputs is given in the appendix. 4.5.1.5 Type of RTD temperature probes or thermistors (optional) The P225 relay offers optional monitoring of 10 RTD temperature probes or 3 thermistors to provide protection against temperature rises in the stator and mechanical bearings of the motor (PROTECTION menu). The type of RTD (PT100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10), or the type of thermistor (PTC/NTC) is selected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. The table of correspondences between the temperature and resistance of the RTD is defined in the appendix. 4.5.2 The CT/VT RATIO submenu In the CT/VT RATIO submenu, the operator sets the primary and secondary ratings of the Line and Earth CTs, and of the phase-phase VT. N.B.: Where the earth current input is connected to a CT summation of the 3 phase current circuits (residual connection, no core balanced CT), the primary and secondary values of "Earth CT" must be set to the same values of those of the "Line CTs".
4.5.3
The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus Four identical sub-menus - LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 are used to configure the 4 programmable LEDs of the MiCOM P225 relay. The user can assign one or several indications to each of these LEDs. These data can originate inside the relay (protection, automatic control, or internal logic state function) or outside the relay (logic input). One LED is lit if at least one of the pieces of information associated with it is valid (logic OR). It is extinguished: either after acknowledgement of the of associated data item or items or on the disappearance of the data item or items which gave rise to it.
The "EMERG. RESTART" information is activated: either following reception of an emergency start command via the logic input programmed on "EMERG. RESTART". It stays lit up as long as the associated logic input is excited or following an emergency start remote order sent via the communication network. It will be extinguished when the "SUCCESSFUL START" information appears.
The "FORBIDDEN START" information is active if at least one of the 4 pieces of data blocking signals is active: either thermal blocking start " FORBID.START" or blocking due to limitation of the number of starts "START NB LIMIT " or blocking due to a minimum time between 2 starts "T betw 2 start". or blocking due to a minimum time between a stop and a start "ABS".
The motor shut down information "MOTOR STOPPED" is activated when logic input L1 (terminals 22-24) is not excited. It remains active until logic input L1 is excited. The motor running information "MOTOR RUNNING" is activated when logic input L1 (terminals 22-24) is excited. It remains active until logic input L1 is deenergised. The successful start information "SUCCESSFUL START" is activated after a motor start phase if at the end of the time delay t Istart the following criteria are respected: the locked rotor at start information ""LOCKED ROTOR" is not present the excessively long start information "EXCES LONG START" is not present.
This information stays active until the motor shuts down (deenergisation of logic input L1). 4.5.4 The ALARM CONFIG. submenu This sub-menu allows the user to configure the software and hardware supervision of the safeguarded RAM and the 3.6V battery: if YES is selected: a RAM ERROR alarm is transmitted if there is a fault in the safeguarded RAM and a BATTERY ERROR alarm is transmitted if the 3.6V battery fails. if NO is selected: no alarm is transmitted in case of a failure of the safeguarded RAM or of the 3.6V battery.
4.5.5
The INPUT CONFIG. sub-menu This allows the user to set the logical state of each logic input: if 1 is selected: the logic input is active when energised, and inactive when deenergised. if 0 is selected: the logic input is inactive when energised, and active when deenergised.
By default the logic inputs are active when they are energised and inactive when deenergised (logic inputs set to 1). Explanations on the relay algorithms, connection diagrams and commissioning procedures in this manual are given for logic inputs set to 1. It is therefore recommended not to modify this setting of the logic inputs. Only a few specific applications may require modification of this setting of the logic inputs. In some versions of the relay, the user can select the type of voltage signal that can energise the logic inputs in the "CONTROL VOLT" cell. if DC is selected, the logic inputs must be energised with a direct voltage Vdc (standard setting) if AC is selected, the logic inputs must be energised with an alternative voltage Vac. THIS CHOICE IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR ALL VERSIONS OF THE RELAY. When the logic inputs are energised with an alternative voltage (AC selected), the performances of the relay for logic input state acquisition are reduced.
WARNING: N.B.:
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.6 The MEASUREMENTS1 and MEASUREMENT2 menus
The measurements of the phase currents and the earth current are expressed as true root-mean-square values. For a 50 Hz motor, the harmonics are taken into account up to the 10th order; for a 60 Hz motor the harmonics are taken into account up to the 8th order. The measurements of the phase-phase voltage VAC is expressed as true root-meansquare values. The measurement of the symmetrical components is taken from the fundamental component of the current. The positive and negative sequence components of the current are calculated on the basis of the three phase currents, and the zero phase sequence component is calculated from the earth current input. The following formulae are used to calculate the symmetrical components:
Ipositive = 1/ 3 (IA + a IB + a IC ) Inegative = 1/ 3 (IA + a IB + a IC ) I0 = 1/ 3 Iearth
The frequency is measured if: the amplitude of voltage VAC is above 5V or if the amplitude of at least one of the three phase currents is greater than 10% of In (In is the rating of the phase current inputs, 1A or 5A defined in the CT RATIO submenu, on the line "LINE CT SEC ="). Where the frequency cannot be calculated, the relays displays "****".
The phase current maximeter retains the greatest current value of one of the three phases outside the motor starting phase. This variable is expressed as a true RMS value. The I2/I1 value is the ratio of the symmetrical components "negative-sequence current" over "positive-sequence current'. The active, reactive and apparent powers are derived assuming that the voltage system is balanced. The active and reactive energy counters represent the energies absorbed by the motor. When these counters reach respectively 20GWh and 20GVARh, they are automatically reset. These counters can be reset by pressing the " key (without password). The energy calculation is updated every second. The power factor is the ratio of the active power over the apparent power.
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 16/52 4.7 The PROCESS menu
A set of measurements relating to operation displayed in the PROCESS menu makes it possible to monitor the utilisation and state of the motor. "%I FULL LOAD" is the percentage ratio of the equivalent thermal current Ieq absorbed by the motor over the thermal current threshold I> (sub-menu 4.10.1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD). The value of the motor thermal state can be reset by the user: either by pressing the " key after entering the password or through a logic input set to " RESET." or through a command received on the RS485 communications port
The estimate of the time before a thermal trip T before TH TRIP is given under the following conditions: the thermal alarm threshold ALARM is reached the equivalent thermal current Ieq is greater than the thermal current threshold I > considering the constant motor overload rate Ieq/I >.
When the above conditions are not respected, the P225 relay displays the value ****. The number of authorised starts of the motor PERMIT START NB takes into account all the criteria for limiting or blocking start, that is, the functions: "limitation of the number of starts", "minimum time between 2 starts", "minimum time between a stop and a start" and "thermal criterion for blocking a start". When there is no limit to the number of authorised starts, the relay displays the value ****. The temperature of each RTD is given in Celsius degrees. "No HOTTEST RTD" indicates the number of the hottest RTD. The indication of the time before a further start is authorised T before START" is given when an inhibition on starting is in progress. This indication takes into account all the criteria for limiting or blocking start, that is, the functions: "limitation of the number of starts", "minimum time between 2 starts", "minimum time between a stop and a start" and "thermal criterion for blocking a start". The counter for the number of starts of the motor is incremented at each start. In contrast, authorisation for the motor to re-accelerate does not increment this counter. The counter for the number of motor operation hours is the sum of hours during which the motor is running.
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.8 The TRIP STATISTICS menu In the TRIP STATISTICS menu the following are displayed: the total number of tripping operations, the number of tripping operations per type of fault.
Tripping can have two possible causes: tripping on a fault: when the P225 relay detects a fault (exceeding a threshold), it generates a tripping order; deliberate tripping: the operator can order tripping from three access points: a logic input, (EXT1 and EXT2 functions) the RS232 port on the front panel, the communications network via the RS485 rear port. N.B.: The tripping orders stored in the memory of the MiCOM P225 protection relay for the statistics are only those transmitted to the tripping relay (logic output RL1). This relay is one of the logic outputs of the MiCOM P225. It is configured in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu. Motor shutdowns for which the command was not relayed via the output relay RL1 of the MiCOM P225 are not taken into account in the TRIP STATISTICS menu.
4.9
The COMMUNICATION menu The MiCOM P225 relay can communicate under the MODBUSTM, Courier or IEC 60870-5 protocols via the RS485 port located at the rear. These protocols are based on the masterslave principle. The P225 relay can therefore be integrated, as a slave, in a digital monitoring and control system. In this system, the supervisor (master), for example a PC, can: read and modify the setting values, remote the measurements, alarm data, changes of state (changes of state of inputs/outputs, changes of setting group), values relating to fault recordings, disturbance recording and the form of the starting current and voltage, issue remote orders such as commands to open or close the circuit breaker/contactor (motor On/Off), to block start, to trig disturbance recording or to acknowledge the relay remotely.
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 18/52 4.10 The PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus
The menus PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 are identical and enable the operator to program 2 different configuration groups (CONFIGURATION menu). Each of these 2 menus is divided into 10 submenus corresponding to the different protection functions: [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT [46] UNBALANCE [48] EXCES. LONG START [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR [27] UNDERVOLTAGE [59] OVERVOLTAGE [37] LOSS OF LOAD [49/38] RTD or [49] THERMISTOR (optional)
The operator can bring each of these protections into service or take them out of service in the submenus of the menu PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2. The setting parameters of the functions taken out of service do not appear on the LCD unit and are not accessible via the communication If the threshold or thresholds of these functions are reached, a time delay with a duration preset by the operator is started. When this time delay expires, if the fault is still present, an instantaneously signal is generated and can be used to energize one of the output relays. All the algorithms of the protection functions, except the thermal replica, are based on the fundamental component of the current. The thermal replica is based on the model working with the true rms values of the line current and the negative-sequence component of the current.
STATE OF THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS (ACTIVE/INACTIVE) ACCORDING TO THE OPERATION MODE OF THE MOTOR The MiCOM P225 protection functions are automatically* activated or deactivated by the relay itself according to the motor's operation mode (motor halted, start-up sequence, reacceleration phase or normal running condition). The table below indicates under which conditions these protection functions are active or inactive. Protective functions Thermal image Short-circuit Earth fault Unbalance Motor halted Activated (Tr)** Activated Activated Activated Start-up sequence Motor running Activated (Te2)** Activated Activated Activated Activated Deactivated Activated Activated**** Activated Activated*** Activated Re-acceleration phase
Activated (Te1)** Activated (Te2)** Activated Activated Activated Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated Activated Activated*** Activated Activated Activated Activated Activated Deactivated Deactivated Activated Activated Activated*** Activated
Excessive long start Deactivated Stalled rotor whilst running Deactivated
Locked rotor at start Deactivated Undervoltage Overvoltage Loss of load Overtemperature * ** Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated
These protection functions are activated by the relay only if they have previously been commissioned by the user. The time constant used in the thermal model depends on the value of the motor load current and on the motor's operating mode. The time constant indicated in brackets is the one used by the relay. The "loss of load" function is activated upon expiry of the Tinhib timer. This timer is user settable, it is initiated by the relay when a motor start is detected. The user can inhibit this function during the starting sequence.
*** **** 4.10.1
The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu: Protection against thermal overload conditions The MiCOM P225 relay produces a thermal image of the motor from the line current and the negative component of the current consumed by the motor, in such a way as to take into account the thermal effects created in the stator and in the rotor. The currents' harmonic components contribute to the motor's heating. For this reason, the thermal replica uses the line current IRMS expressed in true rms value. The negative component currents consumed in the stator generate in the rotor large amplitude currents which create a substantial temperature rise in the rotor winding. The composition carried out by the MiCOM P225 results in an equivalent thermal current Ieq, the image of the temperature rise caused by the current in the motor. The current Ieq is calculated according to the following formula:
Ieq = (IRMS + Ke Inegative)0.5
Starting from this equivalent thermal current, the thermal state of the motor is calculated every cycle (every 20 ms for a 50Hz system) by the MiCOM P225 relay according to the following formula:
i+1 = (Ieq / I >) [1 exp( t / )] + i (t / )
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 20/52 in which: Ke is the negative sequence current recognition factor (adjustable). I > is the thermal overload current threshold.
i is the value of the thermal state calculated above (1 cycle before, ie. 20ms in a 50Hz system). t is the iteration cycle time (20 ms for a 50 Hz system, 16,67 ms for a 60 Hz system). : is the time constant of the motor. As a function of the operating conditions of the motor, the relay uses one of the following 3 thermal time constants: the heating time constant e1, used when the equivalent thermal current Ieq is comprised between 0 and 2. I>, ie. when the motor is running (load or overload condition); the start-up time constant e2, used when the equivalent thermal current Ieq is greater than 2. I>, ie. when the motor is in the start-up stage or in a locked rotor condition; the cooling time constant r which is applied when the motor is shut down (logic input L1 in the zero logic state - terminals 22-24). In this case, the motor no longer consumes current and the value of the thermal state therefore decreases as time passes according to the formula:
i+1 = i exp( t / r)
A thermal overload signal THERM.OV is generated when the value of the thermal state reaches 100 %. N.B.: On interruption of the auxiliary power supply to the P225 relay, the value of the thermal state is stored in the non-volatile memory. On reenergisation of the relay, the value of the thermal state is reset to its value before the interruption if it was lower than 90 %. In the opposite case (greater than 90 %), it is reset to 90 %, to avoid premature tripping of the relay P225 when the auxiliary voltage returns. The thermal state of the motor is displayed in the PROCESS menu. The thermal state value can be reset (see paragraph "4.7 The PROCESS menu" in this section). Even if the "thermal overload" protection function is not used, the thermal current threshold I > must be set so that it is possible to use the excessively long start EXCES LONG START and stalled rotor while motor is running STALLED ROTOR protection functions. Examples of the thermal overload curve are shown in the appendix.
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.10.1.1 Function inhibiting thermal tripping during a start: INHIBIT
This function permits inhibition of the thermal tripping information THERM. OV. during the starting phase. It may be necessary to use this function for some motors with temperature rise characteristics in a starting phase very different from those in a locked rotor condition. If the user brings this function into service, this inhibition is activated as soon as the starting time delay tIstart begins (cf. submenu [48] EXCES. LONG START). On expiry of tIstart (end of the time allowed for starting), this inhibition is deactivated. When this function is activated, that is during the motor starting phase, the value of the thermal state calculated cannot exceed 90 %. This means that thermal tripping cannot take place under any circumstances. At the end of the time allowed for starting, the value of the thermal state is authorised to exceed 90 %. N.B.: This function has no influence on the thermal alarm signal ALARM and thermal base blocking start function FORBID. START. When this function is brought into service, the motor is still thermally protected by the monitoring of the starting time.
4.10.1.2 Function of the thermal image influenced by ambient temperature (optional): RTD1 INFLUENCE When the ambient temperature exceeds + 40C, the admissible motor current diminishes in relation to its rated current. A setting of the protection parameters which is suitable under normal temperature conditions is no longer suitable when the ambient temperature rises above +40C. The MiCOM P225 relay offers the possibility of taking into account this necessary derating of motors. The thermal image can be modified by the ambient temperature measurement. When this function is brought into service by the user, if the ambient temperature rises above + 40C, the value of the thermal threshold I > is automatically modified to adapt the motor protection to the external temperature conditions. The rule for the ambient temperature measurement influencing the thermal image is: For an ambient temperature lower than or equal to + 40C, the thermal image is not modified. For an ambient temperature between + 40C and + 65C, the thermal threshold I > is modified by a multiplying coefficient in compliance with the following formula: Multiplying coefficient = 1 - (ambient temperature in C - 40)/100 For a temperature greater than or equal to + 65C, the thermal threshold I > is modified by a multiplying coefficient of 0.75.
The table below gives the relationship between the ambient temperature measurement and the influence on the thermal image: Ambient temperature (in Celsius) Correction coefficient for the thermal threshold I> (multiplying coefficient) N.B.: This function can only be used if the relay has the option "10 RTD monitoring". The probe used for this function is RTD 1 (terminals 2d-2b-2z). To use this function, a RTD measuring the ambient temperature of the place where the motor is located must be connected to terminals 2d-2b-2z. The operator can program the temperature thresholds of RTD 1 ([49/38] RTD submenu) even if he has brought this RTD1 INFLUENCE function into service. +40 C +45 C +50 C +55 C +60 C +65 C
1,00
0,95
0,90
0,85
0,80
0,75
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 22/52 4.10.1.3 Thermal alarm function: ALARM
The purpose of this function is to produce an alarm signal indicating that the thermal state of the motor has exceeded an adjustable threshold: ALARM. Corrective action can thus be taken before thermal tripping occurs. Once the threshold ALARM is exceeded, the MiCOM P225 relay calculates and displays, in the PROCESS menu (cf. chapter 4.7 The PROCESS menu), an estimate of the time remaining before a thermal trip THERM. OV. occurs. This estimate is given for a constant overload rate. 4.10.1.4 Thermal base blocking start function: FORBID. START This function makes it possible to block a start on a hot motor, or not, as a function of its thermal state. When this function has been adjusted in service by the user, a further start is inhibited for the motor as long as its thermal state is higher than an adjustable threshold FORBID START. It is then necessary to wait until the motor cools down. When the value of the thermal state falls below the threshold FORBID START, the starting of the motor is authorised. The blocking start FORBID START information is activated if both of the 2 following conditions are met: Motor shut down: logic input L1 in the zero state (terminals 22-24). Thermal state value higher than the threshold FORBID START.
The following diagram illustrates the operation of the thermal base blocking start criterion:
Shutdown of the motor Restarting of the motor
Thermal state of the motor
FORBID START threshold
Time Binary input L1 : interlock o/o (52A)
FORBID START signal
P0191ENa
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.10.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu
The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT function which protects the motor against short-circuits between phases uses a definite time phase overcurrent protection. In this menu a short-circuit current threshold I >> and its associated time delay tI >> are adjustable. The P225 relay generates a signal if the phase current exceeds the threshold I >> for a length of time greater than tI >>. In addition to this time-delayed threshold, an instantaneous information (threshold I >> without time delay) is available.
IA IB IC
>=1
I>>
tI>>
Internal logic signals

P0192ENa
N.B.:
The time delay tI >> can be set to instantaneous. When the operator has adjusted the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT function in service, this function is always active whatever the mode of operation of the motor (motor running, shut down, starting phase, locked rotor condition). In the event of saturation of the phase CTs, the MiCOM P225 will detect a short-circuit under the following conditions: Fault current lower than 200 times the limit current value for saturation of the CTs. No remanent flux in the CTs at the time of establishing the fault. No direct current component at the time of establishing the fault. Short-circuit threshold I>> set below 0.9, the limit current value for saturation of the CTs.
4.10.3
The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT function which protects the motor against faults between one or more phases and earth uses a definite time zero phase sequence overcurrent protection. Earth faults create a zero phase sequence current measured either by 3 phase CTs in a residual connection, or directly by a core balanced CT surrounding the 3 conductors. Two independent earth current thresholds (Io > and Io >>) with their associated time delays (tIo > and tIo >>) enable the operator to configure for example an alarm threshold and a tripping threshold. The settings of the thresholds are expressed as a function of the residual current (3 times the zero phase sequence component). For each earth current threshold, time-delayed information and instantaneous information is available.
Io> 3 Io Io>>
tIo>
tIo>>
P0193ENa
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 24/52 4.10.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu
The [46] UNBALANCE function, which protects the motor against unbalance conditions, broken conductor and phase inversions, is based on the measurement of the negative sequence component of the current. Two negative sequence overcurrent thresholds are available: one of them, I2>, is associated with a definite time delay, the other, I2>>, is associated with a inverse time characteristic.
The user can use the threshold I2> to detect the inversion or loss of a phase, or to give an unbalance alarm. The threshold I2>> has an inverse time characteristic which enables it to allow slight instantaneous unbalances to pass whilst more substantial unbalances will be detected more quickly. This inverse time characteristic permits selective clearance of external two-phase faults which appear on the system. This operating characteristic in compliance with the withstand of the motors is given in the appendix.
Ii> IA IB IC Inegative Ii>>
t Ii>
P0194ENa
4.10.5
The [27]UNDERVOLTAGE submenu: Undervoltage protection This function, which makes it possible to detect a voltage drop, uses a phase-phase undervoltage protection with a definite time characteristic. This function is deactivated when the motor is stopped (logic input L1 state = 0) and can also be deactivated during the motor start-up stage ("INHIB V<" set to "YES" by the user). If the measured voltage (voltage between phases A and C) remains below the "V<" threshold for a time greater than or equal to "tV<", a voltage drop signal "tV<" is issued by the P225 relay.
VA-C
V<
INHIB V< during start Motor running
&
tV<
P0235ENa
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.10.6 The [59] OVERVOLTAGE sub-menu: Overvoltage protection
This function, which makes it possible to detect a voltage increase, uses a phase-phase overvoltage protection with a definite time characteristic. If the measured voltage (voltage between phases A and C) remains above the "V>" threshold for a time greater than or equal to "tV>", an overvoltage signal "tV>" is issued by the P225 relay.
VA-C
V>
tV>

P0236ENa
4.10.7
The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu: Protection against excessively long starts The [48] EXCES. LONG START function protects the motor against excessive start-up overcurrent. To this effect, it uses a start-up current threshold Istart and a start-up time-delay tIstart. This threshold and this time delay can be adjusted to allow the starting current to pass. This function is activated (time delay tIstart initiated) as soon as the MiCOM P225 relay detects a start (the criterion for detection of a start is selected in the CONFIGURATION menu). It is deactivated on expiry of the starting current time delay tIstart. If, on expiry of the time delay tIstart, the current consumed by the motor has not fallen below the threshold Istart> again, a prolonged start signal EXCESS LONG START t Istart will be generated.
IA IB IC
>=1
Motor start-up detection Successful start signal
Istart > tI start

0
&
>=1
&
Re-acceleration authorisation
tI start
P0195ENa
Information indicating a "successful start" is generated on expiry of the time delay tIstart if no tripping order has been given. N.B.: During normal operation of the motor, the excessively long start function EXCES LONG START can be reactivated during a flying restart of the motor (re-acceleration of the motor following a voltage dip), that is when re-acceleration is authorised (AUTOMAT. CTRL menu).
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 26/52 4.10.8 The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu
4.10.8.1 Rotor stalled whilst the motor running This function, which makes it possible to detect stalling while the motor is running, is activated immediately after the starting period, that is on expiry of the starting time delay tIstart (submenu 4.10.7 [48] EXCES LONG START). Two parameters can be set: the stalled rotor current threshold Istall with its associated time delay tIstall, the stalled rotor time. The MiCOM P225 relay detects the overcurrent caused by stalling and generates information that the rotor has stalled while the motor is running if the phase current exceeds the threshold Istall for a length of time greater than tIstall.
IA IB IC
>=1
Istall>
Successful start signal Reacceleration in progress
&
tI stall
>=1
Motor starting criterion : 52A+I Motor startup non detected Motor shutdown ( EL1 = 0 )
&
tI stall
P0196ENa
N.B.:
During authorisation of re-acceleration (AUTOMAT. CTRL menu), this function is deactivated during the time delay allowed for starting tIstart. On starting the motor, when the start detection criterion selected is "closure of the contactor/circuit breaker and exceeding of the starting current threshold Istart (52 a + I)", if the relay sees only one of these events, (closure of the breaking device or the appearance of a current greater than Istart), then the function of monitoring a stalled rotor whilst the motor is running is activated.
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.10.8.2 Locked rotor at start
This function, which makes it possible to detect that the motor is locked at the start, is activated only during the starting phase, that is during the course of the starting time delay tIstart. It uses a motor speed indication received via a logic input of the P225 relay set on SPEED SW and the tIstall time-delay: locked rotor time (a speed switch device must be connected to this logic input: paragraph 4.11.4.2. the INPUTS submenu: programmable inputs). On detection of a start, the "locked rotor at start" function is activated: the time delay tIstall begins. At the end of this time delay, the logic input set on SPEED SW must be in logic state 1 to indicate that the motor speed is not zero. The opposite case (zero speed) means that the rotor is locked, so the P225 relay generates a locked rotor at start order LOCKED ROTOR.
Motor start-up detection Speed switch open (EL2 = 0)
t Istall
&
P0197ENa
N.B.:
The speed switch device sends information to the P225 relay indicating, by the closing of a contact, that the rotor is rotating. The time delay tIstall is common to the protection functions for "rotor stalled while motor is running" and "rotor locked at start". If the motor is not fitted with a speed switch device, this function cannot be used and must therefore be deactivated.
4.10.9
The [37]LOSS OF LOAD submenu: Protection against undercurrent/loss of load conditions The [37] UNDERCURRENT function which makes it possible to detect a loss of load (for example the draining of a pump or breakage of a conveyor belt), uses definite time undercurrent protection. The user sets the following parameters: undercurrent threshold I < time delay tI < associated with the undercurrent threshold the inhibit start time delay Tinhib.
This function is deactivated when the motor is shut down (logic input L1 in the 0 state) and also during the inhibit time delay Tinhib. When the P225 relay detects that the motor is starting, this function is activated at the end of the inhibit time delay Tinhib. The time delay Tinhib is useful for motors with no-load starting which take on load gradually at the end of starting. When the motor is running (and after expiry of the inhibit time delay Tinhib), if the value of one of the phase currents consumed by the motor is lower than the threshold I < for a period greater than or equal to tI <, the P225 relay will generate a loss of load signal t I< .
IA IB IC
>=1
I<
&
Motor start-up detection Motor shutdown ( EL1 = 0 )
tI<
tinhib
P0198ENa
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 28/52 4.10.10 The [49/38] RTD submenu: Temperature protection by RTD (optional)
The [49/38] RTD SENSORS [49/38] function is intended to detect abnormal temperature rises of the motor by direct temperature monitoring. This is achieved by monitoring 10 RTDs (Remote Temperature Detectors). The RTDs can be selected from the following types: PT100, Ni120, Ni100 or Cu10 (types selected in the CONFIGURATION menu). For each RTD, the user sets: an alarm threshold RTD # ALARM, a time delay associated with the alarm threshold t RTD# ALARM, a tripping threshold RTD # TRIP, a time delay associated with the tripping threshold t RTD TRIP #.
An alarm signal is generated if the temperature measured exceeds the programmed alarm threshold for a period of time equal to the time delay associated with this threshold. A tripping signal is generated if the temperature measured exceeds the programmed tripping threshold for a period of time equal to the time delay associated with this threshold. The P225 continuously supervises the RTDs proper operation. A "RTD/Therm ERROR" alarm is issued if: a RTD wiring circuit is opening a RTD is short-circuited.
On detection of a RTD failure, a RTD/Therm ERROR alarm message is generated and the over temperature thresholds corresponding to this RTD will be deactivated. The RTD can be located: at the stator windings (protection of the stator, indirect protection of the rotor, detection of failure of the cooling system), at the mechanical bearings (to detect failure of the lubrication), outside the motor (ambient temperature measurement), at the same level as that of the entry of cooling air. N.B.: The symbol # corresponds to the number of the RTD. The RTDs monitored must obligatorily be all of the same type (all of type PT100, or Ni100, or Ni120, or Cu10). It is possible to connect only the RTDs that one wishes to monitor. RTD 1 can be used to measure the ambient temperature and thus influence the thermal image (see chapter 4.10.1.2.).
4.10.11 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu: Temperature protection by thermistor (optional) The [49] THERMISTOR function, like the preceding one, detects abnormal temperature rises. It operates with thermistors of type PTC or NTC (selected in the CONFIGURATION menu). The P225 relay can monitor 3 thermistors (optional). Each thermistor input is linked to an independent threshold (Thermist#) with a fixed time delay of 2 seconds. For each thermistor, the user sets a threshold in ohms. A "Thermist#" order is generated if the thermistor resistance measured exceeds this threshold for a length of time greater than or equal to 2 seconds. N.B.: The symbol # corresponds to the number of the thermistor. The optional function for " 3 thermistors monitoring" is incompatible with the function for " 10 RTD monitoring" option.
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.11 The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu comprises the following 14 sub-menus: 4.11.1 [66] START NUMBER MIN TIME BETW 2 START RE-ACCEL AUTHORIZ INPUTS AND LOGIC EQUATION AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY AUX OUTPUT RLY LATCH AUX RLY TRIP OUTPUT RLY LATCH TRIP ORDER CB FAIL ABS BUS VOLTAGE CTRL CB SUPERVISION
The [66] START NUMBER submenu : Limitation of the number of starts per period The [66] START NUMBER function allows the number of motor start-ups over a given period to be limited. In effect, starting the motor too frequently can be too constraining for the motor (over-heating), for its starting system (starting impedance, electrolytic bath,...) or can in some cases reveal an anomaly in the process operation, The [66] START NUMBER function uses the following adjustable parameters. a monitoring period Treference a number of hot starts limit HOT START NB a number of cold starts limit COLD START NB a start inhibit time delay Tinterdiction.
Each time an motor start is detected, the Treference time delay is initiated and the number of starts registered by the counter corresponding to the temperature of the motor (hot or cold) is incremented by one. At the end of this time delay, the counter in question will be decremented by one. Each time the motor is stopped (change of state of logic input L1: from state 1 to state 0) relay P225 establishes whether either of the two counters has been reached. If so, start inhibit signal START NB LIMIT will be generated for a length of time equal to Tinterdiction. At the end of Tinterdiction, this signal drops out, and it is possible to start the motor again. Examples: Taking as an example cold starts where the limit of the number of cold starts has been set at 3 for a period of Treference.
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 30/52 Case n1:
The number of cold starts limit has been reached and the motor is stopped before the end of the Treference period: the Tinterdiction time delay is therefore initiated when the motor stops. A new start up is permitted at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay.
Istart
2 more starts permitted
1 more start permitted
No start permitted
IN
motor
T reference T reference T reference T inter diction START NB LIMIT
P0199ENa
Case n2: The number of cold starts limit is reached but the motor is not stopped until after the end of the Treference period: therefore the Tinterdiction time delay is not initiated. There is no start inhibit.
Istart
2 more starts permitted
No start permitted
IN
motor
T reference
T reference T reference
START NB LIMIT (logic state at 0)

P0200ENa
User Guide MiCOM P225 Case n3:
Particular cases where at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay, the number of starts counter is still reached (the Tinterdiction time delay period is completed before the end of Treference): any new start up is inhibited until the end of the Treference period (the START NB LIMIT signal is extended).
Istart
No start permitted
IN
motor
T reference T reference T reference T interdiction
START NB LIMIT
P0201ENa
N.B.:
A start is considered cold if the value of the motors thermal state is less or equal to 50% when an motor start phase is detected. A start is considered warm if the value of the motors thermal state is more than 50% when an motor start phase is detected. In cases where at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay period, one of the counters is still reached, the START NB LIMIT start inhibit signal will not drop out until the counter in question is decremented (example case No.3). The number of authorised starts and the waiting time before a new start is authorised are available in the PROCESS menu (see section 4.7. The PROCESS menu).
4.11.2
The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu: Minimum time between two starts Excessive motor or starting system heating caused by two consecutive starts can be avoided by means of the MINI TIME BETW 2 START function. It is based on the use of an adjustable time delay: minimum time between 2 starts T betw 2 start . This time delay is initiated on detection of an motor start up by the P225 relay. When the motor stops, if the T betw 2 start time delay has not finished, start inhibit signal Tbetw 2 start is generated until the end of the Tbetw 2 start time delay.
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 32/52 Examples: Case n1: The stopping of the motor takes place before the end of the Tbetw 2 start time delay period. A start inhibit signal Tbetw 2 start is generated during the Tbetw 2 start period. Case n2:
The stopping of the motor takes place after the end of the Tbetw 2 start time delay period, no start inhibit signal is generated.
Istart
Istart
IN motor
IN motor
t T betw 2 start T betw 2 start

T betw 2 start
T betw 2 start (logic state at 0)

P0202ENa
P0203ENa
4.11.3
The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu: Re-acceleration/load shedding authorisation A fall in voltage from the electrical network causes a reduction in rotor speed. When the voltage is restored, the rotor starts on a re-acceleration phase in order to regain its nominal speed. This re-acceleration manifests itself as an intake of current of approximately the same value as that of the locked rotor current, its duration being relative to the magnitude of the fall in voltage and the duration of the fall in voltage. The MiCOM P225 relay can detect and measure the duration of a voltage drop. By comparing how long this voltage reduction lasts with an adjustable time delay Treacc, the relay will authorise or prevent the motors re-acceleration. A settable undervoltage threshold "Detection V Dip" makes it possible to detect a voltage drop. A settable overvoltage threshold "Restoration V Dip" makes it possible to detect a restoration of the voltage. The user adjusts a time delay Treacc This time delay corresponds to the maximum duration of a voltage sag for which the motor re-acceleration is to be authorised. Upon detection of a voltage drop, the P225 relay initiates a time-delay, Treacc. Three circumstances are possible: Before the end of the time-delay Treacc (duration of the voltage sag shorter than Treacc), the voltage is back (voltage greater than "Restoration V Dip") and within 5 seconds after this restoration, the current absorbed by the motor crosses the Istall threshold (function [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR), then: the P225 goes into monitoring of a start-up sequence (initiation of the tIstart time delay, EXCES LONG START function) and it deactivates the stalled rotor whilst running function. at the end of the tIstart delay allowed for a start, the relay P225 reactivates the stalled rotor whilst running function.
Before the end of the Treacc time-delay (duration of the voltage sag shorter than Treacc), the voltage is back (voltage greater than "Restoration V Dip"), but the current absorbed by the motor does not cross the Istall threshold within 5 seconds after this restoration, then: the P225 relay operation does not change.
At the end of the Treacc time-delay, the voltage drop is still present (duration of the voltage sag greater than Treacc), then: a VOLTAGE DIP signal is issued by the P225 relay. Assigning this signal to the trip output relay (RL1) allows to stop the motor if required.
Examples Case n1: The duration of the voltage drop is less than the Treacc time delay, when the mains voltage is restored, re-acceleration of the motor is authorised.
Voltage sag Network/mains voltage
Detection V dip threshold Restoration Vdip threshold
Current flowing into the motor
Istall>threshold Motor reacceleration
Treacc
Fixed window of 5 s
Drop in voltage condition detected by P225 relay (internal logic signal)
t Istart Reacceleration authorization
stalled rotor whilst running function active stalled rotor whilst running function deactivated
P0237ENa
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 34/52 Case n2:
The duration of the voltage sag is shorter than the Treacc time-delay, but the motor does not reaccelerate within 5 seconds after the voltage has returned. The P225 operation does not change.
Network/mains voltage
Detection V dip threshold Restoration Vdip threshold
Current flowing into the motor
Istall > threshold
Treacc
5 seconds
P0238ENa
Case n3: The duration of the voltage sag is greater than the Treacc timer. A VOLTAGE DIP signal is issued by the P225 relay at the end of Treacc. It can be used to stop the motor.
Network/mains voltage
Restoration Vdip threshold
Detection V dip threshold Treacc
Internal logic signals VOLTAGE DIP
P0239ENa
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.11.4 Binary inputs The P225 has 6 logic inputs, 5 of which are programmable. 4.11.4.1 Fixed input One of the P225s logic inputs is predefined for a fixed use, it is:
Logic input L1 (terminals 22 - 24) is linked to the position of the fuse-contactor or circuit breaker (52a). This input should be linked to the 52a interlock of the cut off device (the 52a interlock is open when the cut off device is open, it is closed when the cut off device is closed). The connection of this logic input is compulsory. 4.11.4.2 The INPUTS submenu: Programmable inputs The user can program five of the P225s logic inputs. These are logic inputs L2 (terminals 26-28), L 3 (terminals 13-15), L 4 (terminals 17-19), L 5 (terminals 21-23) and L 6 (terminals 25-27). The user chooses the allocation of these logic inputs in the INPUTS menu, that is to say to what use the relay P225 will put these external logic data: 4.11.4.2.1 Emergency Start An emergency start may be necessary for safety reasons. When the logic input having been assigned to the EMERG ST function is powered on (logic state at 1), the P225 relay reacts as follows: The thermal state value is muzzled at 90% so that no thermal trip order THERM. OV. can occur during the motor start up phase (see section 4.10.1.1. Function inhibiting thermal tripping during a start: INHIBIT). At the end of the tIstart time delay allocated to the start up, the thermal condition value will be allowed to exceed 90%. The thermal base blocking start signal FORBID. START is suppressed. The blocking start START NB LIMIT signal from the limitation of number of starts function is suppressed. The T betw 2 start blocking start signal from the minimum time between 2 starts function is suppressed. The ABS blocking start signal from the minimum time between a stop and a start function is suppressed.
The motor can therefore be restarted and no thermal tripping can take place during the start up phase. N.B.: The logic input EMERG ST must be kept powered during the whole of the motor start up phase. The relay P225 can also receive a remote emergency start command via the communication network. An emergency start up instruction EMERG ST does not order the closure of the cut off device (motor start up) but makes the motor start up possible.
4.11.4.2.2 Setting group switch/active setting group If PICK UP has been selected in the INPUT CONFIG. sub-menu
Upon receipt of a pick-up (minimum duration 15ms) of the logic input set to "SET GROUP", the MiCOM P225 relay switches between setting groups. The change from one configuration to another can also be achieved via the operator menu or the communication network (see section 4.5.1.1. Configuration Group). If LEVEL has been selected in INPUT CONFIG. submenu
Setting group G1 is active when the logic input set to "SET GROUP" is de-energised (low state). Setting group G2 is active when the logic input set to "SET GROUP" is energised (high state).
A parameter setting group change is not possible if one of the following protection functions is in progress (that is to say if the current threshold of these functions is exceeded): [50/51] SHORT CIRCUIT function [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT function [46] UNBALANCE function [27] UNDERVOLTAGE function [59] OVERVOLTAGE function [48] EXCES LONG START function [50S/51LR] BLOCK ROTOR function [37] LOSS OF LOAD function [49/38] RTD probe function [49] THERMISTANCE function
4.11.4.2.3 Speed switch device A logic input set on SPEED SW can be connected to a speed sensor usually known as a speed switch . The speed switch should be open when the rotor is not turning and should close as soon as it detects rotor rotation. The connecting of this logic input to a speed switch device is necessary in order to be able to use the locked rotor at start protection function. N.B.: When no logic input is set to "SPEED SW", the "Locked rotor at startup" function (refer to chapter 4.10.8.2) cannot be used, it must therefore be deactivated.
4.11.4.2.4 Trigging of the disturbance recording By assigning the command DIST TRIG to a programmable logic input, the operator will be able to initiate the disturbance recordings (RECORD menu) from this input. The energising (rising front) of this programmed logic input on DIST TRIG will trigger a disturbance recording. 4.11.4.2.5 External acknowledgement By dedicating a logic input to the external acknowledgement command EXT RESET , the operator can acknowledge the alarms and unlatch the output relays if the latter were kept energised (see sections 4.11.8 and 4.11.10), by energising this logic input. 4.11.4.2.6 Auxiliary 1 and auxiliary 2 data The EXT1 and EXT2 assignments allow relay P225 to acquire two lots of external binary data. A time delay (t EXT 1 and t EXT 2 respectively) is linked to each assignment. The internal EXT1 signal to the relay is in logic state 1 if the associated logic input is energised for a time longer or equal to t EXT 1 time delay. When the logic input is no longer energised, the logic state of the internal EXT1 signal drops back to 0. The internal EXT2 signal to the relay is in logic state 1 if the associated logic input is energised for a time longer or equal to t EXT 2 time delay. When the logic input is no longer energised, the logic state of the internal EXT2 signal drops back to 0. When the t EXT 1 and t EXT 2 timers expire, the following happen: an alarm message is sent the Alarm LED is lit an event is recorded.
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.11.4.2.7 Auxiliary 3 and auxiliary 4 data
The EXT3 and EXT4 assignments operate similarly to EXT1 and EXT2 , but when the associated timers expire: there is no alarm message, the "Alarm" led is not lit, an event is recorded.
4.11.4.2.8 Thermal state reset When a logic input is assigned to the " RESET" signal, the user can reset the thermal state value (refer to section 4.10.1), by energising this logic input. 4.11.4.2.9 Trip circuit supervision One or two logic inputs can be set to "TRIP CIRC" so as to be used to supervise the trip circuit (refer to section 4.11.14.1). 4.11.4.2.10 No assignment When a logic input is programmed on NONE (None) it becomes inactive. Whether this logic input is switched on or not, relay P225 takes no account of it. 4.11.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu: Programmable AND logic gates The AND LOGIC EQUAT function allows the operator to programme 4 AND logic equations, known respectively as A, B, C and D. Each equation can be the logic AND of one, two or several items of internal logic signals (protection or automatism functions) or external data (state of logic inputs EXT 1 , EXT2 , EXT 3 and EXT4 ) to the relay P225. In this menu, the user constructs each of the 4 logic equations by creating logic AND gate between several items of data. Data is assigned to a logic equation by positioning the corresponding digit to 1. When the digit is set at 0, the data is not assigned to the corresponding logic equation. Examples: You want to create 2 AND logic equations. For the first equation, you wish to implement the AND logic of the following data: time delayed earth fault 1st element (tlo>) successful start (SUCCESS START) logic state of one of the binary inputs (EXT1)
SUCCESS START EXT 1
tIo>
&
P0207ENa
For the second logic equation, you wish to implement le logic AND of the following data: unbalance fault 1st element (tI2>) logic state of one of the binary inputs (EXT1)
tIi>
EXT 1
&
P0208ENa
Programming in the AND LOGIC EQUAT menu is carried out as follows. In this example, the first equation will be the A equation and the second B: t I0> t I2> EXT1 SUCCESS START 4.11.6 DCBA 0001 DCBA 0010 DCBA 0011 DCBA 0001 Allocation of the t lo> data to equation A. Allocation of the t l2> data to equation B. Allocation of the EXT1 data to logic equations A and B. Allocation of the SUCCESS START data to equation A.
The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY: AND logic gate time delay 2 time delays can be linked to each of the 4 programmable logic equations: one operation time delay and one reset time delay. These 8 independent time delays (4 logic equations, 2 time delays per equation) are configurable in the AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY sub-menu. The operation time delay (Toperat) is initiated only if all the associated data in a logic equation are valid (AND gate). It allows the logic equation validation to be delayed for a time Toperat. The reset time delay (Treset) is initiated as soon as any of the data associated with the equation disappears. This allows the equation to remain valid after an item of data has disappeared for a length of time Treset.
Example Logic equation C obtained from the combination (AND logic) of three lots of data 1, 2 and 3 with the Toperat and Treset time delays.
1 2 3 Equation C
T operat
T reset
P0209ENa
Below, a logic diagram shows the different possibilities offered by the MiCOM P225 relay:
&
PROTECTION functions
toperation
treset
&
AUTOMAT. CTRL EXT 1 Logic input EXT 2 Logic input EXT 3 Logic input EXT 4 Logic input External and internal logic signals
toperation
treset
Output relays allocation: RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5
& &
toperation toperation
treset treset
Internal logic signals Remote communication

P0206ENa
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 40/52 4.11.7 The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : Auxiliary programmable output relays
In this menu the user assigns the MiCOM P225 internal and external data to the auxiliary output relays (relays RL2, RL3, RL4 or RL5). These are changeover type relays (1 common, 1 normally open contact, 1 normally close contact). One relay is switched on when at least one of the data items linked to it is valid (OR logic). It drops back once all its associated data has disappeared. Data assignable to the auxiliary output relays can be: of the internal type logic state of a protection function (instantaneous, time delayed signals) logic state of an automatism or state function (blocking start, successful start) the result of an AND logic equation
of the external type signal received via logic inputs ( EXT1 , EXT2 , EXT3 and EXT4 ) signal received via the communication network (remote control by the supervisor).
4.11.8
The LATCH AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : Latching of the output relays In this menu the user programs each auxiliary output relays (relays RL2, RL3, RL4 or RL5) to have a latching operation or a self-reset operation. When a relay set as latching receives an energisation signal, it remains energised even after the signal has stopped. It will be necessary to come and acknowledge the P225 in order to switch off this output relay. N.B.: There are 3 possible ways to acknowledge the P225, and thus switch off one output relay in the event of latching: - press the " button - send an acknowledge order to the configured logic input on EXT RESET - send a acknowledge remote order via the communication network (order given by a supervisor) On loss of auxiliary power, the output relay drops back. On return of auxiliary power, the output relay is re-energised, independently of the fault status (still present or cleared).
4.11.9
The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu: Configuration of the trip output relay Data which is going to control the relay RL1 (terminals 2-4-6) can be assigned using the TRIP OUTPUT RLY sub-menu. This changeover type relay is used to give a tripping order to the cut-off device. The relay RL1 (tripping relay) has the same electrical and mechanical characteristics as the other output relays. Reminder: A certain number of the MiCOM P225 functions are based on the operation of relay RL1, i.e. The Trip Cause Statistics (refer to section 4.8) The Latching of the Trip Output Relay (refer to section 4.11.8) The CB fail function (refer to section 4.11.11) The trip circuit supervision function (refer to section 4.11.14.1) The Surveillance of the cut-off device (refer to section 4.11.14) The record of fault values (refer to section 4.12.1) The triggering of disturbance record (refer to section 4.12.2) The display of data relating to the cut-off device (refer to section 4.12.3)
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.11.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu: Latching of the trip output relay
In this menu, the user selects which functions are to maintain the output relays energised when an order is generated by these functions. Therefore, when one of the functions set as latching issues a trip signal via output relay RL1, the relay remains energised after the end of the trip signal. It will be necessary to come and acknowledge the P225 in order to switch off the output relay RL1. N.B.: Latching of the output relays is optional for each of these functions. The user can chose whether to assign these functions to the trip output relay latching facility . There are 3 possible ways to acknowledge the P225, and thus switch off the output relay RL1 in the event of latching: - press the " pushbutton, - send an acknowledge order to the configured logic input on EXT RESET - send a acknowledge remote order via the communication network (order given by a supervisor) On loss of auxiliary power, the output relay drops back. On return of auxiliary power, the output relay is re-energised, independently of the fault status (still present or cleared).
4.11.11 The CB FAIL sub-menu: Breaker failure protection The breaker failure function is used to quickly detect that a circuit-breaker has not opened (phase fault currents still present) after a trip signal. This function is based on a "I<BF" current threshold and on a "tBF" time-delay; these two settings can be configured by the user. If this function is commissioned by the user, it is activated every time relay RL1 issues a trip command. The "tBF" time-delay is initiated upon energisation of output relay RL1. Then, for each phase, the MiCOM relay detects the first crossing of the current out of the zone created by "I<BF". Upon detecting this crossing, the MiCOM relay initiates another time-delay with a fixed value equivalent to 20 samples. The relay sampling value is 32 samples/cycle. Therefore, the duration of the fixed timedelay is 12.5ms at 50Hz and 10.4ms at 60Hz As long as this 12.5ms timer is running, the relay checks whether the current leaves the current zone again. Where the current is not suppressed by the circuit breaker pole, it will come out of the zone after a half cycle, ie. 16 samples (10ms at 50Hz). The relay restarts the 20 sample timer each time it detects that the current comes out of the preset current zone "I<BF". For each 20 sample window the relay checks that when the current leaves the zone it does so in the opposite direction to the previous crossing: If there is no opposed current crossing, then the relay decides that the circuit breaker pole is open. If there is a current crossing opposed to the previous crossing, then the relay decides that the circuit breaker pole is still close.
At the end of the tBF time-delay, the relay checks the state of each breaker pole (according to the principle described above). If one or several poles are not open, the MiCOM relay issues an alarm message: "CB FAIL".

Trip order t BF timer
20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples
20 samples
I< threshold I< threshold
20 samples 20 samples
20 samples 20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
P0033ENa
FIGURE 4 - CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE DETECTION PRINCIPLE Case n1: The figure below shows a correct opening of the circuit-breaker before the tBF time-delay expires. In this case, no alarm is issued.
CB pole closed internal signal Trip order t BF timer

20 samples 20 samples 20 samples
CB pole opened detection
20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
P0034ENa
FIGURE 5 - OPENING OF THE BREAKER POLE BEFORE tBF DROPOFF
User Guide MiCOM P225 Case n2:
In the figure below the circuit-breaker does not open before the end of the tBF time-delay. In this case the relay issues a CB FAIL indication.
CB failed CB FAIL signal CB pole closed internal signal Trip order t BF timer
20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
P0035ENa
FIGURE 6 - THE BREAKER POLE DOES NOT OPEN BEFORE THE END OF TBF Case n3: The figure below shows a correct circuit-breaker opening. After fault clearance, the phase current does not decrease immediately. This is often due to the phase CT de-magnetisation. In this case, were the breaker failure detection based solely on an undercurrent threshold, there would be an erroneous breaker failure diagnostic.
CB pole closed internal signal Trip order t BF timer

20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples
CB pole opened detection
20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
P0036ENa
FIGURE 7 - DRAG DU TO THE PHASE CT DE-MAGNETISATION
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 44/52 4.11.12 The ABS sub-menu: Minimum time between a stop and a start
The ABS (anti-backspin) function imposed a waiting time between a stop and a re-start of the motor. This waiting time makes it possible to stop rotating before the motor is re-started. It is based on the use of an adjustable time delay: tABS. This time-delay is initiated when a motor stop is detected. As long as this timer is running, an ABS indication issued. This ABS indication disappears at the end of the tABS time-delay.
Current flowing into motor
Motor running
tABS
ABS
P0240ENa
4.11.13 VOLTAGE CHECK sub-menu: Validation of voltage presence before a start This function makes it possible to check that the system voltage level is sufficient to allow a satisfactory motor start sequence. It is only valid when the relay "sees" the motor as stopped. With the motor stopped, the P225 relay issues a "BUS VOLTAGE" indication if the measured voltage (between phases A and C) is below a settable threshold, "V BUS". The pick-up and drop-off of the "BUS VOLTAGE indication are instantaneous.
VA-C
V BUS<
&
Motor halted
Internal logic informations
P0241ENa
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.11.14 The CB SUPERVISION submenu: Circuit-breaker supervision 4.11.14.1 Trip circuit supervision
The TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERV function supervises the trip circuit wiring continuity. One or two logic inputs must have been assigned to "TRIP CIRC" (refer to section 4.11.4.2.9), then connected to the trip coil power circuit. When the TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERV function is set on YES, the MiCOM relay continuously checks the trip circuit whatever the position of the circuit breaker poles, open or closed. This function is inhibited when the protection relay sends a tripping order to the circuit-breaker, via its RL1 output relay. If, during a time equal to tSUP, the state of the logic input(s) assigned to "TRIP CIRC" is 0, the MiCOM relay issues a TRIP CIRC. FAIL alarm.
Logic input "TRIP CIRC" Logic input "TRIP CIRC" Relay 1 energized
&
Internal logic signal
P0242ENa
Connection diagram example: This application diagram requires that 2 logic inputs are assigned to "TRIP CIRC", that the auxiliary contacts 52a (o/o) and 52b (c/o) are available. The MiCOM P225 relay checks the trip circuit wiring continuity whatever the position of the circuit-breaker poles: open or closed.
+Vdc
6 Logic input Logic input
Trip output relay (RL1)
MiCOM P225
52a
52b
Trip coil Vdc

P0243ENa
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 46/52 4.11.14.2 Circuit-Breaker supervision
The P225 relay monitors the operation of the cut-off device (fuse-contactor or circuit breaker). Three criteria are monitored and for each of these an adjustable alarm threshold is available to the user. These thresholds are based on: Monitoring of the time of opening of the cut-off device. This is the time from the moment when the P225 sends an order to the output relay RL1 to the moment when the P225 relay receives the data on the logic input RL1 (terminals 22-24) indicating that the cut-off device is open. Monitoring of the number of opening orders. This is the number of tripping orders which have been given to relay RL1. Monitoring of the sum of broken amp to the power of "n" broken by the switching device (exponent: n =1 or 2). The current value taken into account is that of the current when output relay RL1 receives the trip command.
When one of the thresholds described above is exceeded, an alarm message is available on the display and logic data can be assigned by the user on one or several of the auxiliary output relays (relays RL2, RL3, RL4 or RL5). So as to adapt the MiCOM P225 to any type of cut-off device, the user can also configure 2 time delays: One maintenance of tripping order TRIP T time delay: For each tripping order sent on the relay RL1, the latter is kept switched on for a time TRIP T (if the trip output relay latching facility has not been set on). One maintenance of tripping order CLOSE T time delay: a tripping order (closure of the cutoff device) given by the communication network (remote control CLOSE ORDER) is maintained on the auxiliary output relay for a time equal to CLOSE T. This is the output relay to which the CLOSE ORDER, order has been allocated (AUX OUTPUT RLY menu). N.B.: For the summation of the amps to exponent n cut, the exponent n can be adjusted to the value 1 or the value 2. In all cases, the orders sent on the output relay RL1 (tripping order) are maintained for at least 100 ms.
User Guide MiCOM P225 4.12 The RECORD menu The RECORD menu comprises 3 sub menus: 4.12.1 FAULT RECORD DISTURB RECORD CB MONITORING
The FAULT RECORD submenu A collection of data on each of the 5 last faults registered is displayed in the FAULT RECORD sub menu. For each recording, the relays memorises the fault number the time of the fault the date of the fault setting group (group G1 or G2) active at the time of the fault the faulty phase the function which detected the fault magnitude of fault current or voltage (in fundamental value) the 3 phase currents (in true rms values) the earth current (in true rms value) the phase-phase voltage VAC (in true rms value)
The recordings of the fault are accessible: either through the Human Machine Interface (display front face) either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port) or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)
Fault number 5 is the last fault registered, fault number 1 is the oldest. N.B.: The data registered in non volatile memory are available for 1 year without auxiliary power, thanks to a back-up battery housed in the front face. These data are not erasable. They are managed in a circular list: when this is full, the oldest fault is erased. Faults are signalled by one or several alarm messages.
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 48/52 4.12.2 The DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu
The MiCOM P225 relay offers the possibility of saving 5 disturbance records. The data are acquired at a frequency of 32 samples per electrical cycle, ie. 1600Hz in a 50Hz system or 1920 Hz in 60Hz system, and allows for a very faithful reconstruction of the analogue signals. For each recording, the relays memorises the 3 phase currents the earth current the phase-phase voltage VAC the frequency the state of the 6 logic inputs the state of all the output relays (including the watchdog relay) the date and the time
The total duration of a recording is defined by the configuration of the pre-time and post-time. The pre-time defines the duration of the recording before the disturbance recording triggering order, the post time defines the duration of the recording after the disturbance recording triggering order. In all cases, the total duration of a recording cannot exceed 2.5 seconds.
Duration of recording : 2,5 seconds maximum
Pre-time Triggering order
Post-time
P0244ENa
The triggering of a disturbance recording can be generated: when a logic entry programmed on DIST TRIG is excited (see section 4.11.4.2.4 Trigging of the disturbance recording) on receipt of a remote control from a supervisor on the communications network (RS485 rear port) on receipt of a remote control from MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port) when one of the following occurs (exclusive choice): instantaneous over-stepping of one of the following current thresholds: I>>, Io>, Io>>, V< or V> (instantaneous short-circuit, instantaneous earth fault 1st and 2nd stages, instantaneous under- and overvoltage data respectively) or when output relay RL1 is excited (relay dedicated to the tripping of the cut-off device). The excitement of this relay can be due to the detection of an electrical fault or to a voluntary opening order (opening remote control on the communication network, external order relayed by one of the logic inputs).
The disturbance recordings can be retrieved: either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port) or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)
User Guide MiCOM P225 N.B.:
P225/EN FT/B11 Page 49/52 If the configuration of the pre-time and post-time corresponds to total recording duration of more than 2.5 seconds then the posttime duration is automatically reduced so that the total recording duration is 2.5 seconds. Disturbance recordings are not erasable. They are managed in a circular list: when this is full, the oldest recording is erased. The data registered in non volatile memory are available for 1 year without auxiliary power, thanks to a back-up battery housed in the front face. When the disturbance recordings are extracted from relay P225 using the MiCOM S1 support software, they are stored in the COMTRADE format.
4.12.3
The CB MONITORING submenu display of the values related to the cut-off device In this menu the operator with access to data relating to the cut-off device: Summation of the amps exponent n switched by the cut-off device for each phase. Total number of operations of relay RL1 Opening time of the cut-off device. N.B.: These data are those calculated by the relay P225 whilst in the CB SUPERVISION menu the operator with access to the adjustment of the parameters to generate alarm data when a threshold is exceeded. The way in which relay P225 calculates its data is explained in the section CB SUPERVISION .
4.13
ALARM messages The management of the alarms is carried out directly on the front face screen. The display of alarm messages takes priority over that of the value by default (selected in CONFIG. SELECT submenu), so that as soon as an alarm is detected by the, the message is displayed on the MiCOM P225 relay screen. The alarm messages are classified into 2 categories: Motor alarm message Relay hardware or software fault, or RTD/thermistor failure message.
The display of a HARDWARE ALARM message takes priority over the display of a MOTOR ALARM message. N.B.: Upon loss of auxiliary power supply, the alarm messages disappear. They are restored upon return of the power supply. The MOTOR ALARM messages
4.13.1
The ALARM menu Data considered as motor alarm are displayed in the MOTOR ALARMS menu. If several alarms appear, they are written to memory in the order of their detection. They are displayed in reverse chronological order (the most recent alarm first, the oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is indicated. Example This message indicates an earth fault (time delayed threshold tIo>>). This alarm is the 2nd out of total of 7. t I0>> 2/7
The operator can read all of the alarm messages using the ! key, without any necessity to key in the pass word.
The operator can acknowledge the alarms using the " key. Keying in the password is not necessary. The operator can acknowledge each message one at a time, or acknowledge all the messages by going to the end of the list and acknowledging all the messages by pressing the " key. N.B.: 4.13.2 If an alarm has not been acknowledged, it will not be possible to view the default display programmed by the operator.
The HARDWARE ALARM messages The safety and availability of the MiCOM P225 relay can be improved by a cyclic autotest procedure of both hardware and software. Each time the P225 relay is switched on, autodiagnostic tests are initiated: these tests deal with the output relays (engaging/triggering tests), the microprocessor, the memories (EEPROM checksum calculation, RAM tests) and the acquisition circuit of each analogue input. The hardware faults are split into 2 groups: Minor faults: these are faults classified as non serious (communication fault, analogue output fault, 3.6V battery, RTD or thermistor failure and internal clock). Major faults: these are serious faults (RAM fault, EEPROM data fault, EEPROM calibration fault, analogue signal acquisition fault, watchdog fault).
Any major fault recorded is immediately the subject of an alarm and provokes the activation of the WATCHDOG relay (relay WD, terminals 35-36-37), as well as the switching off of the other output relays. The acknowledged alarms are all written to memory in the order of their appearance. The display of the alarms is ensured in reverse chronological order (the most recent alarm first, the least recent last). Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is indicated in the top left hand corner of the display. The operator can read all of the alarm messages using the ! key, without any necessity to key in the password. The acknowledgement of the relay hardware alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only the disappearance of the cause of the alarm will provoke their acknowledgement. The display of a hardware fault (equipment fault) takes priority over the other alarms (non equipment fault). N.B.: In the case of major hardware alarm and when the trip output relay RL1 has been configured latched, this relay drops out too.
5.
5.1
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Event records The MiCOM P225 relay records 75 state changes in non-volatile memory and dates with a 1ms accuracy. For each state change (event) the relay gives the date, time and label. This applies to any change of state of the logic inputs/outputs, the alteration of one or several setting parameters, alarm or triggering data. Please refer to Chapter CTCommunications for more information. The recordings of the consignment of states can be downloaded: either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port) or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port) N.B.: The data are recorded in non volatile memory and are available for one year without auxiliary power, thanks to a back-up battery housed in the front face. These consignments are not erasable. They are managed in a circular list: when this is full, the change of state of the oldest is erased.
5.2
Recording of the form of the starting current and voltage The MiCOM P225 relay records the form of current and voltage of the latest start. In order to do this, it records every 5 cycles (every 100 ms if the frequency is at 50 Hz) the maximum value of one of the three line currents, and the value of the line-line voltage VA-C. The values recorded are expressed in True RMS values. The recording is initiated following detection by the relay of an motor start up, it stops at the end of the tlstart time delay allocated to the start up. The file containing the recording of the form of the starting current can be repatriated on a PC: either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port) or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port). The data will be stored in COMTRADE format. N.B.: The data are recorded in non volatile memory and are available for one year without auxiliary power, thanks to a back-up battery housed in the front face. The maximum duration of a recording is limited to 200 seconds.
5.3
Standard remote control via the RS485 communications port In the AUX OUTPUT RLY sub-menu, it is possible to assign the ORDER1 information to one or several output relays. A communications command (via the RS485 port) issues the ORDER1 information, which is latched during a fixed 200ms period.
5.4
Block start via the RS485 communications port In the AUX OUTPUT RLY sub-menu, it is possible to assign the ORDER2 information to one or several output relays. A communication command (via the RS485 port) issues the ORDER2 information which is latched until another communication command (via the RS485 port) makes the first one drop off. Inserting an output relay, to which the ORDER2 information has been assigned, into the start coil circuit allows a supervisor to remotely block/authorise a motor re-start.
6.
6.1
PC CONNECTION LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS

Connection configuration Configuration is indicated in the figure below:
MiCOM P225 Relay
Laptop
Battery
9 pin front port Serial communication port (COM1 or COM2) Serial data connector (up to 15m)
P0232ENa
DCE Pin 2 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 5 0V
Serial connexion
DTE Pin 2 Rx Pin 3 Tx Pin 5 0V

P0246ENa
The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 (IEC60870 compliant) serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC connected locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in the figure above. This is a pin-to-pin connection which must not be used as a permanent connection. 6.2 Configuration of the relay and PC Once the physical connection is established, the relay and PC settings must be checked in order to start the communication. The default communication settings of the RS232 port are as follows: Protocol Rate Address Message format Modbus 19 200 bits/s Must be set in the "Communication" menu, "Address" line. 11 bit - 1 bit start, 8 bits data, 1 bit even, 1 bit stop.
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225
P225/EN HI/B11
MENU OF THE HMI
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 1/48
CONTENT
1. 2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
THE OP. PARAMETERS MENU THE CONFIGURATION MENU

The CONFIG. SELECT submenu The CT/VT RATIO submenu The LED submenus The ALARM CONFIG. submenu The INPUT CONFIG. submenu
3 4
4 5 6 8 9
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11
THE MEASUREMENTS 1 & MEASUREMENTS 2 SUBMENUS THE PROCESS MENU THE TRIP STATISTICS MENU THE COMMUNICATION MENU THE PROTECTION G1 AND G2 MENUS
The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu The [46] UNBALANCE submenu The [27] UNDERVOLTAGE submenu The [59] OVERVOLTAGE submenu The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu The [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu The [49/38] RTD submenu The [49] THERMISTOR submenu
10 12 13 14 15
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
8.
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9
THE AUTOMAT. CTRL MENU

The [66] START NUMBER submenu The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu The INPUTS submenu The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu The LATCH AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu
26
26 27 28 29 30 32 33 36 37
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 2/48 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu The CB FAIL submenu The ABS submenu The BUS VOLTAGE CTRL submenu The CB SUPERVISION submenu
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 39 41 42 43 44
9.
9.1 9.2 9.3
THE RECORD MENU

The FAULT RECORD submenu The DISTURB RECORD submenu The CB MONITORING submenu
45
45 46 47
1.
THE OP. PARAMETERS MENU

OP. PARAMETERS PASSWORD = **** Press the ! and " keys to move around in the OP PARAMETERS menu. Modification of the password : key in the old password and confirm it. Then press the # key, key in the new password and confirm the whole input with the # key. The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the password has changed. Displays the model of MiCOM relay. Displays your reference code. It contains letters between A and Z. To enter it, press the # key for each letter and use the ! and " to move forwards and backwards in the alphabet. After each letter, press the $ key to enter the next letter. At the end of the input, press the # key to confirm your reference code. Displays the software version code. Acquisition of the reference frequency of the electrical power system. There is a choice of : 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Displays the active setting group number : 1 : PROTECTION Group 1 active 2 : PROTECTION Group 2 active INPUTS ST = 654321 000000 Displays the state of the 6 binary inputs. The binary inputs are numbered from 1 to 6 starting from the right. The state of each binary input is displayed immediately below : - state 0 : input inactive - state 1 : input active OUTPUTS ST = 54321 00000 Displays the state of the output relays. The output relays are numbered from 1 to 5 starting from the right. The status of each output relay is displayed immediately below : - state 0 : output inactive - state 1 : output active DATE 14/09/00 TIME 16:35:30 Selection and display of the time. Selection and display of the date.
DESCRIPTION = P225 REFERENCE = XXXX
SOFTWARE VERSION = 3.C FREQUENCY = 50 Hz ACTIVE SETTING = GROUP 1
2.
2.1
THE CONFIGURATION MENU

The CONFIG. SELECT submenu CONFIGURATION CONFIG. SELECT Press the ! and " keys to enter the CONFIGURATION menu. To move about in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, use the ! and " keys. To go into the CT/VT RATIO, LED 5, LED 6, LED 7, LED 8, ALARM CONFIG. and INPUT CONFIG., press the % and $ keys. Selection and display of the way to switch over from one setting group to another. Choice of : PICK-UP LEVEL SETTING GROUP 1 Selection and display of the configuration group. This cell appears only if the above PICK-UP mode has been selected. Choice of : group 1 or group 2 1 : PROTECTION G1 2 : PROTECTION G2 DEFAULT DISPLAY IA RMS Selection and display of a default value. Choice of : IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS, IN RMS, THERM ST, % I LOAD , TbefSTART, TbefTRIP, VAC RMS, POWER FACT, WATTs or VARs Selection and display of the start detection criterion. Choice of : 52A or 52A + Istart Selection and display of the analog output type : 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA (optional) Selection and display of the value transmitted by the analog output n1(optional). Choice of : IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS, IN RMS, THERM ST, % I LOAD, TbefSTART, TbefTRIP, VAC RMS, POWER FACT, WATTs, VARs, TC RTD1, TC RTD2, TC RTD3, TC RTD4, TC RTD5, TC RTD6, TC RTD7, TC RTD8, TC RTD9, TC RTD10 or No Hottest RTD Selection and display of the value transmitted by the analog output n2 (optional). choice : idem as above. Configuration of the maximum analog output rating if a power value is selected. Choice of : 10KW, 50KW, 100KW, 200KW, 500KW, 1MW, 10MW, 500 MW, 1GW, 4GW (if reactive power, VAR value). Selection and display of the type of RTD temperature probe (optional) : PT100, Ni100, Ni120 or Cu10 Selection and display of the type of thermistor 1 (optional) Choice of : PTC or NTC Selection and display of the type of thermistor 2 (optional) Choice of : PTC or NTC Selection and display of the type of thermistor 3 (optional) Choice of : PTC or NTC
SET GRP CHANGE INPUT = LEVEL
START DETECTION 52 A + I ANALOG. OUTPUT 0 - 20 mA DATA TYPE ANALOG 1 IA RMS
DATA TYPE ANALOG 2 WATTs MAX VALUE ANALOG 2 1 MW
RTD type = PT100 Thermist 1 type = PTC Thermist 2 type = NTC Thermist 3 type = PTC
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 2.2 The CT/VT RATIO submenu CONFIGURATION CT/VT RATIO
Press the ! and " keys to enter the CONFIGURATION menu To move about in the CT/VT RATIO submenu, press the ! and " keys. To go into the CONFIG. SELECT, LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8, ALARM CONFIG. and INPUT CONFIG. submenus, press the % and $ keys.
LINE CT PRIM = **** LINE CT SEC = * E/GND CT PRIM = **** E/GND CT SEC = * LINE VT PRIM = ***** LINE VT SEC = ***
Selection and display of the primary rating of the phase CT. The value is entered on 4 figures : from 1 to 3000 in steps of 1. Selection and display of the secondary rating of the phase CT. The value is to be selected between either 1 or 5. Selection and display of the primary rating of the earth CT. The value is entered on 4 figures : from 1 to 3000 in steps of 1. Selection and display of the secondary rating of the earth CT. The value is to be selected between either 1 or 5. Selection and display of the primary VT rating. The value is entered on 5 digits : from 1 to 20000 in steps of 1. Selection and display of the secondary VT rating. The value is entered on 3 digits. Two ranges : 57-130 Volt or 220 480 Volt.
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 6/48 2.3 The LED submenus CONFIGURATION LED 5
Press the ! and " keys to enter the CONFIGURATION menu. To move about in the LED 5 submenu, press the ! and " keys. To go into the CONFIG. SELECT, CT/VT RATIO, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8, ALARM CONFIG. and INPUT CONFIG., press the % and $ keys. To link LED 5 with the thermal overload function so that it lights up if the thermal overload function operates, press #, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again to confirm. This links LED 5 to the thermal alarm threshold ALARM
THERM OVERLOAD ? YES
ALARM ? NO t I >> ? NO t I0> ? NO t I0>> ? NO t I2 > ? NO t I2 >> ? NO t I< ? NO EXCES LONG START ? t Istall ? NO LOCKED ROTOR ? NO EMERG RESTART ? NO FORBIDDEN START ? NO t RTD 1, 2, 3 ALARM ? NO t RTD 1, 2, 3 TRIP ? NO t RTD 4, 5, 6 ALARM ? NO t RTD 4, 5, 6 TRIP ? NO t RTD 7, 8, 9, 10 ALARM ? NO NO
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tI>> (protection against short-circuits) This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIo> (protection against Earth faults) This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIo>> (protection against Earth faults) This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tI2> (protection against unbalances) This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tI2>> (protection against unbalances) This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tI< (protection against undercurrent / loss of load) This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIstart (protection against excessive long starts) This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIstall (protection against rotor stalling when the motor is running) This links LED 5 to the function rotor locked on starting . This links LED 5 to the emergency restart information. This links LED 5 to the forbidden start information. This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD1 ALARM , tRTD2 ALARM and tRTD3 ALARM (temperature protection : optional) This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD1 TRIP, tRTD2 TRIP, and tRTD3 TRIP (temperature protection : optional) This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD4 ALARM, tRTD5 ALARM and tRTD6 ALARM (temperature protection : optional) This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD4 TRIP , tRTD5 TRIP, and tRTD6 TRIP (temperature protection : optional) This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD7 ALARM, tRTD8 ALARM, tRTD9 ALARM and tRTD10 ALARM (temperature protection : optional)
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 t RTD 7, 8, 9, 10 TRIP ? Thermist 1, 2, 3 ? NO EXT 1 ? NO EXT2 ? NO MOTOR STOPPED ? NO MOTOR RUNNING ? NO SUCCESSFUL START ? t V< ? NO VOLTAGE DIP ? NO t V> ? NO BUS VOLTAGE ? NO CB FAIL. ? NO TRIP CIRCUIT FAIL ? NO NO
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 7/48 This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD7 TRIP, tRTD8 TRIP, tRTD9 TRIP and tRTD10 TRIP (temperature protection : optional) This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds Thermist 1, Thermist 2 and Thermist 3 (temperature protection : optional) This links LED 5 to the auxiliary time delay tEXT1 This links LED 5 to the auxiliary time delay tEXT2 This links LED 5 to the indication with the information motor stopped This links LED 5 to the indication with the information motor running . This links LED 5 to the indication with the information successful start . This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tV< (undervoltage protection). This links LED 5 to the load shedding information further to a voltage dip (cf. re-acceleration authorization). This links LED 5 to the time delayed tV> (overvoltage protection). This links LED 5 to the BUS VOLTAGE information (Bus voltage too low to enable start). This links LED 5 to the CB FAIL information (CB Fail). This links LED 5 to the TRIP CIRC FAIL information (open trip circuit).
NO
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 8/48 2.4 The ALARM CONFIG. submenu CONFIGURATION ALARM CONFIG.
Press the ! and " keys to enter into the CONFIGURATION menu. To move about in the ALARM CONFIG. Submenu, press the ! and " keys. To go into the CONFIG. SELECT, CT/VT RATIO, LED 5, LED 6, LED 7, LED 8 and INPUT CONFIG., press the % and $ keys. Configuration of the presence or absence of an alarm message in case of equipment fault RAM ERROR or BATTERY ERROR. Choice : YES or NO .
BATTERY ALARM = NO
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 2.5 The INPUT CONFIG. submenu CONFIGURATION INPUT CONFIG.
Press the ! and " keys to enter into the CONFIGURATION menu. To move about in the INPUT CONFIG. menu, press the ! and " keys. To go to the CONFIG. SELECT, CT/VT RATIO, LED 5, LED 6, LED 7, LED 8 and ALARM CONFIG. submenus, press the % and $ keys. To configurate the active/inactive state of each binary input, press the # key, use the ! and " keys, Then confirm your choice pressing the # key. 0 : inactive state when a control voltage is applied on. 1 : active state when a control voltage is applied on.
INPUT PICK-UP
654321 111111
CONTROL VOLT = DC
Configuration of the control voltage type necessary to power on the binary inputs. Choice : DC : Direct current voltage Vdc AC : Alternative current voltage Vac Warning ! This choice is only possible on some versions of the product.
3.
THE MEASUREMENTS 1 & MEASUREMENTS 2 SUBMENUS

MEASUREMENTS 1 IA RMS = 0.00 A IB RMS = 0.00 A IC RMS = 0.00 A IN RMS = 0.00 A VAC RMS = 0.00 V I1 POSITIVE= 0.00 A I2 NEGATIVE = 0.00 A I0 ZERO = 0.00 A FREQUENCY = 0.0 Hz MAX PH CURRENT = CLR ? = CL 0.00 A I2/I1 RATIO = **** N.B. : Display of the frequency of the power system supplying the motor, calculated from the voltage or the phase current signals. Display of the maximum phase current value outside the starting period Display of the ratio negative sequence on positive sequence of the current. Display of the negative sequence current Display of the zero sequence current Press the ! and " keys to move about in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu. Display of the current of phase A (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT/VT RATIO submenu) Display of the current of phase B (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT/VT RATIO submenu) Display of the current of phase C (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT/VT RATIO submenu) Display of the earth current (true RMS value) taking into account the earth CT ratio (CT/VT RATIO submenu) Display of the phase A phase C voltage (true RMS value) taking into account the VT phase ratio (CT/VT RATIO submenu) Display of the positive sequence current
The 3 phase currents, the earth current and the line voltage are displayed as true RMS values : taking into account up to the 10th harmonic at 50 Hz and up to the 8th at 60 Hz.
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 MEASUREMENTS 2 WATTs = kW VARs = kVAR VAs = kVA
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 11/48 Press the ! and " keys to move about in the MEASUREMENTS 2 menu Display of the active power taking into account the CT and VT phase ratio (CT/VT RATIO submenu) Display of the reactive power taking into account the CT and VT phase ratio (CT/VT RATIO submenu) Display of the apparente power taking into account the CT and VT phase ratio (CT/VT RATIO submenu) Display of the active energy taking into account the CT and VT phase ratio (CT/VT RATIO submenu) Display of the reactive energy taking into account the CT and VT phase ratio (CT/VT RATIO submenu) Resetting of the active and reactive energy meters : press the & key. Display of the power factor
0.00 0.00 0.00
WATT-Hours = MWh 67.83 VAR-Hours= MVARh 25.24
POWERHours RESET CLR = [C] POWER FACTOR = 0.00
4.
THE PROCESS MENU

PROCESS % I FLC 0% THERMAL STATE = CLR ? =[C] 0% T before TH TRIP **** Temperature RTD 1= No Hottest RTD 5 PERMIT START NB **** T before START 0s Last Start I= 0.0 A Last Start Time 0s MOTOR START NB CLR = [C] 0 EMERG RESTART NB CLR = [C] MOT RUN. HOURS CLR = [C] 0h Display of the number of starts of the motor.To reset to zero, press & key. Display of the number of emergency starts. To reset to zero, press & key. Display of the number of running hours of the motor. To reset to zero, press the & key. Display of the duration of the last start. Display of the number of starts permitted. Display of the time to wait before a new start is permitted. Display of the current of the last start. C Press the ! and " keys to move about in the PROCESS menu. Display of the current flowing into the motor as a percentage of the thermal current threshold I> Display of the thermal state of the motor (tripping at 100 %). For the test phases of the P225 relay, you can reset the thermal state to zero by pressing the key & Display of the time before thermal tripping occurs, once the thermal alarm threshold ALARM is exceeded. Display of the temperature of the RTD1 (optional) and similarly for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5, RTD6, RTD7, RTD8, RTD9 and RTD10 (optional) Display of the hottest RTD number.
5.
THE TRIP STATISTICS MENU

TRIP STATISTICS STATISTICS CLR = [C] TOTAL TRIP NB 0 OPERATOR TRIP NB 0 THERM TRIP NB = t I >> TRIP NB = t IO>, t IO>> TRIP NB = t I2 >, t I2 >> TRIP NB = tV< TRIP NB = tV> TRIP NB = 0 0 0 0 0 0 Press the ! and " keys to move about in the TRIP STATISTICS menu. To reset all the tripping statistics to zero, press key & NO Display of the total number of tripping operations (with and without fault). Display of the number of deliberate tripping operations (without fault) Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a thermal overload. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a short-circuit. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an Earth fault. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an unbalance. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an undervoltage. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an overvoltage. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a load shedding further to a voltage dip. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an excessively long start. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a stalled rotor while the motor is running. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a locked rotor when starting. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by the protection against undercurrents/loss of load. Display of the number of tripping operations caused by the temperature protection function by RTD1 (optional) and so on for RTD2, RTD3 ,RTD4 ,RTD5, RTD6, RTD7, RTD8, RTD9 and RTD10 (optional) Display of the number of tripping operations caused by the temperature protection function by thermistor 1 (optional) dito for thermistor 2 and thermistor 3 (optional). Display of the number of tripping operations caused by the validation of equation A, dito for equations B, C and D.
VOLTAGE DIP TRIP NB = 0 t Istart TRIP NB = t Istall TRIP NB = 0 0
LOCKED ROT TRIP NB = 0 t I < TRIP NB = RTD1 TRIP NB = 0 0
Thermist 1 TRIP NB =
EQUATION A TRIP NB = 0
6.
THE COMMUNICATION MENU

If communication is under MODBUSTM protocol COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION ? YES Press the ! and " keys to move about in the COMMUNICATION menu. Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the MiCOM P225 relay. To activate the communication, press the # key, select YES by using the ! and "keys, then press # again to confirm. Selection and display of the transmission speed. Choice : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds. Selection and display of the parity in the communication frame. Choice of : With (even or odd) or Without. Selection and display of the number of stop bits. Choice : 1 or 2. Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM P225 relay in the network. Choice from : 1 to 255. Selection and display of the date format. Choice : IEC or PRIVATE.
BAUD RATE = 19200 Bd PARITY = WITHOUT STOP BITS = 1 RELAY ADDRESS = 1 DATE FORMAT CONFIG = IEC
If communication is under Courier protocol COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION ? YES Press the ! and " keys to move about in the COMMUNICATION menu. Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the MiCOM P225 relay. To activate the communication, press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again to confirm. Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM P225 relay in the network. Choice : from 1 to 254.
RELAY ADDRESS = 1
If communication is under IEC 60870-5-103 protocol COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION ? YES Press the ! and " keys to move about in the COMMUNICATION menu. Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the MiCOM P225 relay. To activate the communication, press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again to confirm . Selection and display of the transmission speed. Choice : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bauds. Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM P225 in the network. Choice : from 1 to 254.
BAUD RATE = 19200 Bd RELAY ADDRESS = 1
7.
7.1
THE PROTECTION G1 AND G2 MENUS

The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu PROTECTION G1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the thermal overload function : press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. To switch on the thermal inhibition on starting function : press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. To switch on the thermal inhibition on starting function : press the #, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the thermal overload current threshold I> : from 0,2 In to 1,5 In in steps of 0,01 In. Setting of the value of the negative sequence contribution factor Ke in the thermal image : from 0 to 10 in steps of 1. Setting of the value of the overload time constant Te1 : from 1 to 180 min in steps of 1 min. Setting of the starting time constant value Te2 : from 1 to 360 min in steps of 1 min. Setting of the value of the cooling time constant Tr : from 1 to 999 min in steps of 1 min. To switch on the influence of a RTD temperature function (optional) : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. To switch on the thermal alarm function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and "keys. To confirm the choice, press the # key. Setting of the thermal alarm threshold value ALARM : from 20% to 100% in steps of 1%. To switch on the thermal inhibition of start function : press the # key, select YES bu using the ! and " keys. To confirm the choice, press the # key. Setting of the threshold value for thermal inhibition of start FORBID START : from 20% to 100% in steps of 1%.
THERMAL OVERLOAD ? FUNCT ? YES INHIBIT ? YES I > = 0.2 In
Ke = 3 Te1 = 1 mn Te2 = 1 mn Tr = 1 mn RTD1 INFLUENCE ? YES
ALARM ? YES ALARM = 20 % FORBID START ? YES FORBID START ? 20 %
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 16/48 7.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu PROTECTION G1 [50/51] SHORT CIRCUIT I>> FUNCTION ? YES I >> = 1.0 In t I >> = 10 ms
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the others submenus, press the % an $ keys. To switch on the short-circuit function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and "keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the short-circuit current threshold value I>> : from 0,2 to 12 In in steps of 0.1 In. Setting of the time delay tI>> associated with the I>> threshlold : from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0,01 s.
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 7.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu PROTECTION G1 [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT IO> FUNCTION ? YES IO> = 0.002 Ion t IO> = 0 ms IO>> FUNCTION ? YES IO>> = 0.002 Ion t IO>> = 0 ms
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the Earth fault function (Io> threshold) : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the first earth fault current threshold value Io> : from 0,002 to 1 Ion in steps of 0,001 Ion. Setting of the tIo> time delay associated with the Io> threshold : from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0,01 s. To swith on the Earth fault function (Io>> threshold) : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the second earth fault current threshold value Io>> : from 0,002 to 1 Ion in steps of 0,001 Ion. Setting of the tIo>> time delay associated with the Io >> threshold : from 0 ms to 100 s in steps of 0,01 s.
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 18/48 7.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu PROTECTION G 1 [46] UNBALANCE
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [46] UNBALANCE submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To swith on the unbalance function (I2> threshold) : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the first unbalance current threshold value I2> : from 0,04 to 0,8 In in steps of 0,01 In. Setting of the tI2> time delay associated with the I2> threshold : from 0 ms to 200 s in steps of 0,01 s. To switch on the unbalance function (I2>> threshold) : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the TMS time multiplier value of the curve associated with the I2>> threshold : from 0,2 to 2 in steps of 0,025. Setting of the second unbalance current threshold value I2>> : from 0,04 to 0,8 In in steps of 0,01 In.
I2> FUNCTION ? YES I2 > = 0.01 In t I2 > = 0 ms I2>> FUNCTION ? YES TMS I2>> = 1 I2 >> = 0.01 In
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 7.5 The [27] UNDERVOLTAGE submenu PROTECTION G1 [27] UNDERVOLTAGE
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [27] UNDERVOLTAGE submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the %and $ keys . To switch on the undervoltage function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the undervoltage threshold value V<: from 5 to 130 Volt or 20 to 480 Volt. Setting of the tV< time delay associated with the V< threshold : from 0 to 600 s in steps of 0,01 s. Inhibition of the [27] UNDERVOLTAGE function during the motor start sequence.
V< FUNCTION ? YES V< = 5V t V<= 0s INHIB V< ? YES
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 20/48 7.6 The [59] OVERVOLTAGE submenu PROTECTION G1 [59] OVERVOLTAGE
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [59] OVERVOLTAGE submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the overvoltage function : press the # key, select YES bu using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the overvoltage threshold value V>: from 5 to 260 Volt or from 20 to 960 Volt. Setting of the tV> time delay associated with the V> threshold : from 0 to 600 s in steps of 0,01 s.
V> FUNCTION ? YES V> = 5V t V>= 0s
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 7.7 The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu PROTECTION G 1 [48] EXCES LONG START EXCES LONG START FUNCT ? YES Istart DETECTION = 1.0 I t Istart = 1s
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [48] EXCES LONG START submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the excessively long start function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the Istart detection threshold : from 1 to 5 I in steps of 0,5 I. Setting of the tIstart time delay associated with the Istart threshold : from 1 to 200 s in steps of 0,01 s.
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 22/48 7.8 The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu PROTECTION G 1 [51LR-50S] BLOCK ROTOR BLOCKED ROTOR FUNCT ? YES t Istall = 0,1 s STALLED ROTOR ? YES Istall DETECTION = 1.0 I LOCKED ROTOR AT START ? YES
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the blocked rotor function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the blocked rotor tIstall time delay associated with the Istall current threshold : from 0,1 to 60 s in steps of 0,1 s. To switch on the stalled rotor with motor running function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the stalled rotor detection current threshold Istall: from 1 to 5 I in steps of 0,5 I. To switch on the locked rotor at start function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 7.9 The [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu PROTECTION G 1 [37] LOSS OF LOAD
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the undercurrent function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the undercurrent threshold value I< : from 0,1 to 1 In in steps of 0,01 In. Setting of the tI< time delay associated with the I< threshold : from 0,2 to 100 s in steps of 0,1 s. Setting of the inhibition time of the undercurrent / loss of load function on starting Tinhib : from 50 ms to 300 s in steps of 0,1 s.
I< FUNCTION ? YES I<= 0.1 In tI<= 0.2 s T inhib = 50 ms
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 24/48 7.10 The [49/38] RTD submenu PROTECTION G 1 [49/38] RTD
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [49/38] RTD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the temperature protection function using RTD 1 : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the alarm temperature threshold value for RTD1 ALARM : from 0 to 200C in steps of 1C. Setting of the t RTD1 ALARM time delay associated with the RTD1 ALARM threshold : from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0,1 s. Setting of the tripping temperature threshold value for RTD1 TRIP : from 0 to 200C in steps of 1C. Setting of the t RTD1 TRIP time delay associated with the RTD1 TRIP threshold : from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0,1 s. and so on for the RTD2, RTD3 ,RTD4, RTD5 ,RTD6, RTD7, RTD8, RTD9 and RTD10
RTD 1 FUNCTION ? YES RTD 1 ALARM = 0C t RTD 1 ALARM = 0.0 s RTD 1 TRIP = 0C t RTD 1 TRIP = 0.0 s
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 7.11 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu PROTECTION G 1 [49] THERMISTOR
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu. To move about in the [49] THERMISTOR submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the temperature protection function using thermistor 1 : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the resistance threshold value for Thermistor 1: from 100 to 30000 in steps of 100 . To switch on the temperature protection function using thermistor 2 : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the resistance threshold value for Thermistor 2 : from 100 to 30000 in steps of 100 . To switch on the temperature protection function using thermistor 3 : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the resistance threshold value for Thermistor 3 : from 100 to 30000 in steps of 100 .
Thermistor 1 FUNCT ?
YES
Thermist 1 = 0.1 k Thermistor 2 FUNCT ?
YES
Thermist 2 = 0.1 k Thermistor 3 FUNCT ?
YES
Thermist 3 = 0.1 k
8.
8.1
THE AUTOMAT. CTRL MENU

The [66] START NUMBER submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL [66] START NUMBER Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the [66] START NUMBER submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the number of starts limitation function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the Treference reference time during which the starts are counted : from 10 to 120 min in steps of 5 min. Setting of the threshold of the number of hot starts : from 0 to 5 in steps of 1. Setting of the threshold of the number of cold starts : from 1 to 5 in steps of 1. Setting of the time delay during which starting is forbidden Tinterdiction : from 1 to 120 min in steps of 1 min.
START NB LIMIT FUNCT ? YES Treference = 10 mn HOT START NB= 0 COLD START NB= 1 T interdiction = 1 mn
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 8.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL MIN TIME BETW 2 2 START TIME BETW START FUNCT ? YES T betw 2 start = 1 mn
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the minimum time between two starts function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the minimum time between two starts Tbetw 2 start : from 1 to 120 min in steps of 1 min.
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 28/48 8.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL REACCEL AUTHORIZ
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the RE-ACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the re-acceleration autorisation function, press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the voltage dip detection threshold :
REACCEL AUTHORIZ FUNCT ? YES Detection = V DIP Restoration = V DIP
5.0 V
from 5 to 130 Volt or from 20 to 480 Volt. Setting of the voltage restoration detection threshold :
5.0 V
from 5 to 260 Volt or from 20 to 960 Volt. Setting of the Treacc time delay (maximum voltage dip duration to authorize a re-acceleration) : from 0,1 s to 10 s in steps of 0,01 s.
VOLTAGE DIP DURAT Treacc = 0.2 s
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 8.4 The INPUTS submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL INPUTS
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the INPUTS submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.
INPUT 2 = NONE INPUT 3 = NONE INPUT 4 = NONE INPUT 5 = NONE
To programme the inputs numbered 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, press the # key, press the ! and " to scroll through the possible allocations : - none (no allocation) : NONE - emergency start : EMERG ST - change of configuration : SET GROUP - speed switch : SPEED SW - Triggering of the disturbance record : DIST TRIG - external reset : EXT RESET - external auxiliary 1 : EXT 1 - external auxiliary 2 : EXT 2 - external auxiliary 3 : EXT 3 - external auxiliary 4 : EXT 4 - thermal state reset : RESET - trip circuit wiring supervision : TRIP CIRC To confirm your selection, press the # key.
INPUT 6 = NONE t EXT 1 = 0s t EXT 2 = 0s t EXT 3 = 0s t EXT 4 = 0s Setting of the tEXT1 time delay associated with the EXT 1 input : from 0 to 200s in steps of 0,01s. Setting of the tEXT2 time delay associated with the EXT 2 input : de 0 to 200s in steps of 0,01s. Setting of the tEXT3 time delay associated with the EXT 3 input : de 0 to 200s in steps of 0,01s. Setting of the tEXT4 time delay associated with the EXT 4 input : de 0 to 200s in steps of 0,01s.
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 30/48 8.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL AND LOGIC EQUAT
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To allocate the thermal tripping information (protection against thermal overloads) to one (or more) of the equations A, B, C, D : press the # key, allocate the valu 1 under the letter by pressing the ! and " keys, to increase or decrease, then confirm the selection using the # key. Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold ALARM Allocation of one (or more) block start signal(s) : - thermal start prohibition FORBIDDEN START - prohibition due to the start number limitation - prohibition due to the minimum time between two starts - prohibition due to the minimum time between a stop and a restart (ABS function). Allocation of the I>> instantaneous threshold (shortcircuit). Allocation of the tI>> time-delayed threshold (shortcircuit). Allocation of the Io> instantaneous threshold (earth fault). Allocation of the tIo> time-delayed threshold (earth fault). Allocation of the Io>> threshold (earth fault). Allocation of the tIo>> time-delayed threshold (earth fault). Allocation of the tI2 > time-delayed threshold (unbalance). Allocation of the tI2>> time-delayed threshold (unbalance) Allocation of the tIstart time-delayed threshold (excessively long starts). Allocation of the tIstall time-delayed threshold (stalling of the motor when the motor is running). Allocation of the function rotor locked at start . Allocation of the I< time-delayed threshold (undercurrent / loss of load). Allocation of the function circuit breaker failure
THERM OV. D C B A 0000
ALARM
DCBA 0000
FORBIDDEN D C B A START 0000
I >> t I >> IO> t IO> IO>> t IO>> t I2 > t I2 >> EXCES LG START t Istall LOCKED ROTOR tI< CB FAIL.
DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 TRIP CIRC. D C B A FAIL 0000 t RTD 1 ALARM t RTD 1 TRIP DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 31/48 Allocation of the function trip circuit wiring supervision . Allocation of the tRTD1 ALARM time-delayed threshold (temperature protection : optional). Allocation of the tRTD1 TRIP time-delayed threshold (temperature protection : optional) and so on for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5, RTD6, RTD7, RTD8, RTD9 and RTD10 (optional). Allocation of the Thermist1 threshold (temperature protection : optional) dito for Thermistors 2 and 3 (option) Allocation of the EXT1 input (instantaneous or timedelayed). Allocation of the EXT2 input (instantaneous or timedelayed). Allocation of the EXT3 input (instantaneous or timedelayed). Allocation of the EXT4 input (instantaneous or timedelayed). Allocation of the information successful start . Allocation of the tV< time-delayed threshold (undervoltage). Allocation of the load-shedding information VOLTAGE DIP (re-acceleration function). Allocation of the tV> time-delayed threshold (overvoltage). Allocation of the BUS VOLTAGE information (Busbar voltage too low to enable a start).
Thermist1
DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000
EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 EXT4 SUCCESS START tV< VOLTAGE DIP tV>
BUS VOLTAGED C B A 0000
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 32/48 8.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY EQU. A T operat = 0s EQU. A T reset = 0s
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. Setting of the Toperat time delay allocated to the logic equation A : de 0 to 3600 s in steps of 0,1s Setting of the Treset time delay allocated to the logic equation A : from 0 to 3600 s in steps of 0,1s and so on for the equations B, C and D.
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 8.7 The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL AUX OUTPUT RLY
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the AUX OUTPUT RLY, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To allocate the thermal tripping information (protection against thermal overloads) to one (or more) of the outputs n 2 to 5 : press the # key, allocate the value 1 under the letter by pressing the ! and " keys to increase or decrease, then confirm the selection using the # key. Allocation of the ALARM thermal alarm threshold . Allocation of the thermal block start signal FORBID START. Allocation of the I>> instantaneous threshold (shortcircuit). Allocation of the tI>> time-delayed threshold (shortcircuit). Allocation of the Io> instantaneous threshold (earth fault). Allocation of the tIo> time-delayed threshold (earth fault). Allocation of the Io>> instantaneous threshold (earth fault). Allocation of the tIo>> time-delayed threshold (earth fault). Allocation of the tI2> time-delayed threshold (unbalance). Allocation of the tI2>> time-delayed threshold (unbalance). Allocation of the tIstart time-delayed threshold (excessively long starts). Allocation of the tIstall time-delayed threshold (stalling of the rotor when the motor is running). Allocation of the function rotor locked at start . Allocation of the I< time-delayed threshold (undercurrent / loss of load). Allocation of the function limitation of the number of starts . Allocation of the Tbetw 2 start time delay (minimum time between 2 starts function). Allocation of the tRTD1 ALARM time-delayed threshold (temperature protection : optional).
THERM OV.
5432 0000
ALARM FORBID. START I >> t I >> IO> t IO> IO>> t IO>> t I2 > t I2 >> EXCEX LG START t Istall LOCKED ROTOR tI< START NB LIMIT T betw 2 start t RTD1 ALARM
5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 34/48 t RTD1 TRIP 5432 0000
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 Allocation of the tRTD1 TRIP time-delayed threshold (temperature protection : optional) and so on for the RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5, RTD6, RTD7, RTD8, RTD9 and RTD10 probes (optional). Allocation of the Thermist 1 threshold (temperature protection : optional) dito for the thermistors 2 and 3 (option) Allocation of the input EXT1 (instantaneous or with time delay). Allocation of the input EXT2 (instantaneous or with time delay). Allocation of the input EXT3 (instantaneous or with time delay). Allocation of the input EXT4 (instantaneous or with time delay). Allocation of the ABS function (time between a stop and a restart). Allocation of the tV< time-delayed threshold (undervoltage). Allocation of the load-shedding information VOLTAGE DIP (re-acceleration function). Allocation of the tV> time-delayed threshold (overvoltage). Allocation of the information BUS VOLTAGE (busbar voltage too low to enable a start). Allocation of the closing command (order given by a supervisor via the RS485). Allocation of the tripping command (order given by a supervisor via the RS485). Allocation of the ORDER 1 command (any order given by a supervisor via the RS485). Allocation of the ORDER 2 command (any order given by a supervisor via the RS485). Allocation of the successful start information. Allocation of the logic equation A. Allocation of the logic equation B. Allocation of the logic equation C. Allocation of the logic equation D. Allocation of the circuit breaker opening time threshold.
Thermist1
5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000
EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 EXT4 ABS tV< VOLTAGE DIP tV>
BUS VOLTAGE 5 4 3 2 0000 CLOSE ORDER TRIP ORDER ORDER 1 ORDER 2 SUCCESS START t EQU. A t EQU. B t EQU. C t EQU. D CB OPEN TIME 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 CB OPER NB SAn CB FAIL. TRIP CIRC. FAIL GROUP 2 ACTIVE 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 35/48 Allocation of the threshold of the number of operations performed by the circuit breaker. Allocation of the threshold of the sum of amperes to the power of n interrupted by the circuit breaker. Allocation of the circuit breaker failure function. Allocation of the trip circuit wiring supervision function. Allocation of the information configuration group 2 active (PROTECTION G2 active).
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 36/48 8.8 The LATCH AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL LATCH AUX RLY LATCH RL2 ? YES LATCH RL3 ? YES LATCH RL4 ? YES LATCH RL5 ? YES
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the LATCH AUX RLY submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. Latching of the RL2 auxiliary output relay : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then confirm the selection using the # key. Latching of the RL3 auxiliary output relay. Latching of the RL4 auxiliary output relay. Latching of the RL5 auxiliary output relay.
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 8.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL TRIP OUTPUT RLY
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To allocate the thermal tripping information (protection against thermal overloads) to the tripping relay (RL1 relay) : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then confirm the selection by using the # key. Allocation of the tI>> time-delayed threshold (shortcircuit). Allocation of the tIo> time-delayed threshold (earth fault).
THERM OVERLOAD ? YES
t I >> ? YES t IO> ? YES t IO>> ? YES t I2 > ? YES t I2 >> ? YES EXCES LONG START ? t Istall ? YES LOCKED ROTOR ? YES tI<? YES t RTD 1 TRIP ? YES YES
Allocation of the tIo>> time-delayed threshold (earth fault). Allocation of the tI2> time-delayed threshold (unbalance). Allocation of the tI2>> time-delayed threshold (unbalance). Allocation of the tIstart time-delayed threshold (excessively long start). Allocation of the tIstall time-delay threshold (rotor stalled while motor is running). Allocation of the function rotor locked at start . Allocation of the tI< time-delayed threshold (undercurrent / loss of load). Allocation of the tRTD1 TRIP time-delayed threshold (temperature protection : optional) and so on for the RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5, RTD6, RTD7, RTD8, RTD9 and RTD10 probes (optional). Allocation of the Thermist 1 threshold (temperature protection : optional) dito for the Thermist 2 and Thermist 3 thresholds (optional). Allocation of the EXT1 input (instantaneous or timedelayed). Allocation of the EXT2 input (instantaneous or timedelayed). Allocation of the logic equation A.
Thermist 1 ? YES
EXT 1 ? YES EXT 2 ? YES EQUATION A ? YES EQUATION B ? YES EQUATION C ? YES
Allocation of the logic equation B. Allocation of the logic equation C.
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 38/48 EQUATION D ? YES t V< ? YES VOLTAGE DIP ? t V> ? YES YES Allocation of the logic equation D.
Allocation of the tV< time-delayed threshold (undervoltage). Allocation of the load shedding information VOLTAGE DIP (re-acceleration function). Allocation of the tV> time-delayed threshold (overvoltage).
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 8.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL LATCH TRIP ORDER
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. Latching of the output relay n1 (trip output relay) on thermal overload tripping, press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys, then confirm the selection using the # key. Latching on exceeding the time-delayed short-circuit threshold tI>> Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIo> (earth fault). Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIo>> (earth fault). Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tI2> (unbalance). Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tI2>> (unbalance). Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIstart (excessively long start). Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIstall (rotor stalled while running). Latching on LOCKED ROTOR information (rotor stalled at start). Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tI< (undercurrent / loss of load). Latching on exceeding one of the t RTD1 TRIP, or RTD2, or RTD3 thresholds. Latching on exceeding one of the t RTD4 TRIP, or RTD5, or RTD6 thresholds. Latching on exceeding one of the t RTD7 TRIP, or RTD8, or RTD9 or RTD10 thresholds. Latching on exceeding one of the Thermist1, 2 or 3 thresholds. Latching on tEXT1 auxiliary time-delay.
LATCH THERM OVER LOAD ? YES
LATCH t I >> ? YES LATCH t IO> ? YES LATCH t IO >> ? YES LATCH t I2 >? YES LATCH tI2 >> ? YES LATCH EXCES LONG START ? YES LATCH tIstall YES LATCH LOCKED ROTOR ? YES LATCH tI< ? YES LATCH t RTD1,2,3 TRIP ? YES LATCH t RTD4,5,6 TRIP ? YES LATCH t RTD7,8,9 10 TRIP ? YES LATCH Thermist 1, 2, 3 ? YES LATCH EXT 1 ? YES LATCH EXT 2 ? YES LATCH EQU. A ? YES LATCH EQUA. B ? YES LATCH EQUA. C ? YES
Latching on tEXT2 auxiliary time-delay. Latching on validation of equation A. Latching on validation of equation B. Latching on validation of equation C.
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 40/48 LATCH EQUA. D ? YES LATCH t V< ? YES LATCH VOLTAGE DIP ? YES LATCH t V> ? YES
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 Latching on validation of equation D. Latching on exceeding the t V< time-delayed threshold (undervoltage). Latching on VOLTAGE DIP load-shedding information (re-acceleration function). Latching on exceeding the t V> time-delayed threshold (overvoltage).
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 8.11 The CB FAIL submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL CB FAIL
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the CB FAIL submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.
CB FAIL FUNCT ? I< BF =
YES
To switch on the CB FAIL function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key again. Setting of the I< BF current threshold value :
0.1 In t BF ? 30 ms
from 0,1 to 1 In in steps of 0,01 In. Setting of the tBF time delay : from 30ms to 10s in steps of 10ms.
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 42/48 8.12 The ABS submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL ABS
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the ABS submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the ABS function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key again. Setting of the t ABS time delay (minimum time between a stop and a restart) : from 0ms to 7200s in steps of 1s.
ABS FUNCTION ? YES t ABS = 0 ms
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 8.13 The BUS VOLTAGE CTRL submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL BUS VOLTAGE CTRL
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the BUS VOLTAGE CTRL submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the BUS VOLTAGE CTRL function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key again. Setting of the V BUS threshold value (presence of bus voltage before a start) from 5 to 130 Volt or from 20 to 480 Volt.
BUS VOLTAGE CTRL FUNCT ? YES V BUS = 5.0 V
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 44/48 8.14 The CB SUPERVISION submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL CB SUPERVISION
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To move about in the CB SUPERVISION submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERV function (trip circuit supervision) : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key again. Setting of the tSUP time delay : from 100ms to 10s in steps of 10ms. Switching on the circuit breaker opening time function : select YES. Setting of the circuit breaker opening time threshold : from 50ms to 1s in steps of 50ms. Switching on the CB operation number function : select YES. Setting of the threshold of the CB operation number : from 0 to 50000 in steps of 1. Switching on the threshold of the sum of amperes to the power n interrupted by the circuit breaker : select YES. Setting of the threshold of the sum of amperes to the power n interrupted : from 106 to 4 000x106 in steps of 106 E06 means 106. Setting of the exponent n : 1 or 2 1 Setting of TRIP T : from 0,2 to 5s in steps of 0,1s. Setting of CLOSE T : from 0,2 to 5s in steps of 0,1s.
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERV ?
YES
t SUP = 0.1 s CB OPENING TIME ? YES CB OPENING TIME = 50 ms CB OPERATION NB ? YES CB OPERATION NB = 0 SAn? YES SAn= E06
n= TRIP T = 200 ms CLOSE T = 200 ms
9.
9.1
THE RECORD MENU

The FAULT RECORD submenu RECORD FAULT RECORD Press the ! and " keys to enter the RECORD menu. To move about in the FAULT RECORD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the DISTURB RECORD and CB MONITORING submenus, press the % and $ keys. 5 Displays the fault number. To display the information on one of the last 5 faults, press the # key, select the number (1 to 5) by using the ! and " keys, then press the # key to confirm the selection. Displays the time of the fault occurence. Displays the date of the fault occurence. Displays the active configuration group (1 or 2) at the time of the fault. Displays the faulty phase (or phases) : phase A, phase B or phase C. Displays the origin of the fault : Here it is exceeding the instantaneous threshold I>>. Displays the fault magnitude. Displays the value of the current of phase A (IA) at the time of the fault (true RMS value). Displays the value of the current of phase B (IB) at the time of the fault (true RMS value). Displays the value of the current of phase C (IC) at the time of the fault (true RMS value). Displays the value of the earth current IN at the time of the fault (true RMS value). Displays the phase A phase C voltage value at the time of the fault (true RMS value).
RECORD NUMBER
FAULT TIME 16 : 39 : 23 : 82 FAULT DATE 01/09/98 ACTIVE SET GROUP. 1 PHASE IN FAULT PHASE B FAULT DETECTED BY I>> MAGNITUDE 1.917 kA IA MAGNITUDE 1.917 kA IB MAGNITUDE 1.997 kA IC MAGNITUDE 1.931 kA IN MAGNITUDE 0.03 A V AC MAGNITUDE 5126 V
P225/EN HI/B11 Page 46/48 9.2 The DISTURB RECORD submenu RECORD DISTURB RECORD
Press the ! and " keys to enter the RECORD menu. To move about in the DISTURB RECORD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the FAULT RECORD and CB MONITORING submenus, press the % and $ keys. Setting of the pre-time time delay : from 0,1 to 2,5 s in steps of 0,1 s. Setting of the post time time delay : from 0,1 to 2,5 s in steps of 0,1 s. Selection of the criterion for trigging the disturbance recording : on exceeding certain instantaneous thresholds (I>>, Io>,Io>>, V< or V>) : ON INST. on tripping of the n1 relay (trip output relay) : ON TRIP.
PRE-TIME = 0.1 s POST-TIME = 0.1 s DISTUR REC TRIG= ON INST.
Menu of the HMI MiCOM P225 9.3 The CB MONITORING submenu RECORD CB MONITORING
Press the ! and " keys to enter the RECORD menu. To move about in the CB MONITORING submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To reset to zero the sum of the amperes to the power of n interrupted : press the & key. Displays the sum of the square amperes interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of phase IA. Displays the sum of the square amperes interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of phase IB. Displays the sum of the square amperes interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of phase IC. Displays the number of operations performed by the circuit breaker. To reset to zero : press the & key. Displays the opening time of the circuit breaker.
SAn CLR ? = [C] S A 2 IA = E06 S A 2 IB = E06 S A 2 IC = E06 CB OPERATION NB = CLR ? =[C] 0 CB OPEN TIME = 100 ms N.B. :
If the user has set the exponent n to the value 1 in the CB SUPERVISION submenu, the term SA will replace the term SA2 to indicate the sum of the amperes interrupted in place of the sum of the square amperes interrupted.
BLANK PAGE
Maintenance MiCOM P225
P225/EN CM/B11
MAINTENANCE
P225/EN CM/B11 Page 1/18
CONTENT
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2
INTRODUCTION MAINTENANCE PERIOD MAINTENANCE CHECKS

Alarms Logic inputs Output relays Maintenance mode Testing the output relays
3 4 5
5 5 5 5 6
4.
4.1 4.2
EXCHANGING THE RELAY

Remove the withdrawable part Exchanging the relay and the case
7
7 8
5. 6.
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8
CHANGING THE BATTERY EQUIPMENT FAILURE: HARDWARE ALARMS

Types of equipment failure Minor faults Major faults Equipment failures and solutions COMM. ERROR CLOCK ERROR RAM ERROR RTD/Therm ERROR BATTERY ERROR EEPROM ERROR DATA EEPROM ERROR CALIBR. CT/VT ERROR
9 10
10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12
7.
7.1.1 7.1.2
PROBLEM SOLVING
Password lost or not accepted Communication
13
13 13
8. 9.
LIST OF THE RELAY ALARM MESSAGES LIST OF THE MOTOR ALARM MESSAGES
15 16
BLANK PAGE
1.
INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P225 relays are fully numerical in design and employ a high degree of selfchecking. Any fault affecting a hardware or software component is instantly detected and signalled as a device fault. BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE "HANDLING AND SAFETY" SECTION.
2.
MAINTENANCE PERIOD
It is recommended that products supplied by Schneider Electric receive regular monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals. MiCOM P225 relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be performed to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and that the external wiring is intact. If a Preventive Maintenance Policy exists within the customer's organisation, the recommended product checks should be included in the regular programme. Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as: the operating environment the accessibility of the site the amount of available manpower the importance of the installation in the power system the consequences of failure
3.
MAINTENANCE CHECKS
Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by utilising the communications ability of the relays, it is recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally.
3.1
Alarms The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so, press the read key ! repeatedly to step through the alarms. Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED(s) provided the original cause no longer exists.
3.2
Logic inputs The logic inputs (opto-isolators) can be checked to ensure that the relay responds on energisation. This test checks that all 6 opto-isolated outputs of the MiCOM P225 are functioning correctly. Energise the logic inputs one at a time with voltage V, with the terminal numbers in accordance with the table below. The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed in the "OP.PARAMETERS" menu. "1" indicates an energised input, "0" indicates a de-energised input. LOGIC INPUTS Input L1 Input L2 Input L3 Input L4 Input L5 Input L6 N.B.: Supply to terminals +V 22 26 13 17 21 25 24 28 15 19 23 27 V 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 OP.PARAMETERS/INPUT value
The voltage V to be applied to the logic inputs is defined in Chapter TD Technical Specifications, paragraph 6.3 "Logic inputs" in this Technical Guide.
3.3 3.3.1
Output relays Maintenance mode The output relays can be individually controlled by setting the MiCOM relay to Maintenance mode. The MiCOM relay can be switched to Maintenance mode either: by using the MiCOM S1 software, or by remote control via the RS485 communication port (refer to Chapter CT Communication in this Technical Guide).
P225/EN CM/B11 Page 6/18 While the MiCOM relay is in Maintenance mode: All protective functions are disabled All automation functions are disabled All output relays are off (including the watchdog relay) The ALARM LED flashes The MAINTENANCE MODE alarm appears
Communication via RS232 and/or RS485 ports is once more available.
When the MiCOM relay is in Maintenance mode: A remote control signal is used to energise the required output relays Another remote control signal must be sent to de-energise the output relays.
Once the output relay tests are completed, reset the MiCOM relays to normal operation mode by using the MiCOM S1 software, or via the RS485 communication port.
3.3.2
Testing the output relays Connect a continuity tester across the terminals of each output contact to check the correct contact position (open/closed circuit) as in the table below. The state of each output relay (1: energised/0: standby) is given in the "OP. PARAMETERS" menu. OUTPUT RELAY WD (watchdog) RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 Output relay on standby Normally closed 36-37 2-4 8-10 14-16 1-3 7-9 Normally open 36-35 2-6 8-12 14-18 1-5 7-11 Output relay energised Circuit open 36-37 2-4 8-10 14-16 1-3 7-9 Circuit closed 36-35 2-6 8-12 14-18 1-5 7-11
4.
EXCHANGING THE RELAY

The case and the rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the relay without having to disconnect the scheme wiring. BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE "HANDLING AND SAFETY" SECTION. The method is to replace the withdrawable part, but it may be necessary to replace the complete relay (with the case):.
4.1
Remove the withdrawable part To remove the withdrawable part, lift the upper flap on the front panel to reveal a slot in the centre towards the top. Using a screwdriver (approx. 3 mm cross-section) insert it in the hole in the middle of the slot then move the screwdriver from right to left. This moves a cam which has the effect of moving the withdrawable part of the MiCOM relay a few centimetres. Lift the lower flap on the front panel. Proceed as above. The withdrawable part can now be easily removed from the case.
Upper flap
Lower flap
P0432ENa
Before replacing the withdrawable part in the case, reset the 2 opposing cams. N. B.: MiCOM P225 relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the withdrawable part is removed. In case of fuse-contactor controlled by a voltage loss coil, do not remove the withdrawable part if the contactor is closed. In fact, removing the withdrawable part will break the power circuit for the voltage loss coil, causing the opening of the contactor.
P225/EN CM/B11 Page 8/18 4.2 Exchanging the relay and the case
BEFORE WORKING AT THE REAR OF THE RELAY, ISOLATE ALL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT SUPPLIES TO THE RELAY. DISCONNECT THE RELAY EARTH CONNECTION FROM THE REAR OF THE CASE. NOTE: The use of a magnetic-bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.
WITHDRAW THE RELAY FROM THE PANEL, RACK, ETC. CAREFULLY AS IT WILL BE HEAVY OWING TO THE INTERNAL TRANSFORMERS. TO REINSTALL THE REPAIRED OR REPLACEMENT RELAY, FOLLOW THE ABOVE INSTRUCTIONS IN REVERSE, ENSURING THAT EACH TERMINAL BLOCK IS RELOCATED IN THE CORRECT POSITION AND THE CASE EARTH IS REPLACED.
5.
CHANGING THE BATTERY

MiCOM P225 relays have a battery to maintain status data and the correct time if the auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained includes event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure. Instructions for replacing the battery Open the lower flap on the front of the relay. Gently extract the battery from its location. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to prise the battery free. Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery location are free from corrosion, grease and dust. Place the replacement battery in position ensuring that the polarity is correct. NOTE: Only use a AA Lithium battery with a voltage rating of 3.6V.
ENSURE THAT THE BATTERY IS SECURELY HELD IN ITS LOCATION. CLOSE THE LOWER FLAP ON THE FRONT OF THE RELAY. Battery disposal The battery which has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
6.
6.1
EQUIPMENT FAILURE: HARDWARE ALARMS

Types of equipment failure As soon as an internal fault (i.e. an equipment failure) is detected in the MiCOM relay: An alarm is displayed as a priority on the front panel display. The "Warning" fault LED is illuminated: constant (major failure) flashing (minor failure)
The equipment failure relay (WD) is closed (only for major faults).
Equipment failures can be divided into 2 types, minor and major. An equipment failure (minor or major) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel using the keypad. Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the fault and the associated alarm. 6.1.1 Minor faults The following hardware alarms are considered minor faults: COMM. ERROR CLOCK ERROR RAM ERROR ANALOG OUTPUT ERROR RTD/Therm ERROR BATTERY ERROR
The protective relay continues to function in the event of a minor equipment failure. 6.1.2 Major faults The following hardware alarms are considered major faults: EEPROM ERROR DATA EEPROM ERROR CALIBR. CT/VT ERROR
The protective relay ceases to function in the event of a major equipment failure, the protective and automation components are disabled and all output relays are de-energised: the equipment failure relay (WD) is off, as are all other output relays if already energised even if programmed "latched".
Maintenance MiCOM P225 6.2 6.2.1 Equipment failures and solutions COMM. ERROR
Communication module failure via RS485 port. This can be a hardware or software failure. Action: 6.2.2 If communication is not being used, declare communication OFF in the COMMUNICATION menu. If communication is being used, remove the withdrawable part and return it to the factory for repair.
CLOCK ERROR This alarm appears if there are problems accessing the clock or there is an inconsistency in the date being read. Action: If the alarm persists, remove the withdrawable part and return it to the factory for repair.
6.2.3
RAM ERROR This alarm appears if the result of the checksum calculation in safeguarded RAM is incorrect. The data in RAM will be considered inconsistent and will be lost. This alarm may appear after downloading a new firmware version, after loss of the auxiliary power supply while the relay was writing to safeguarded RAM or if there is a RAM hardware fault. Action: Press button C on the relay front panel to clear the alarm. If the alarm persists, de-energise then re-energise the relay. If the alarm still persists, remove the withdrawable part and return it to the factory for repair. As this is a minor alarm, it is possible to disable monitoring (which clears the alarm) by setting "BATTERY ALARM" to NO (ALARM CONFIG. sub-menu.)
6.2.4
RTD/Therm ERROR This alarm appears if: The impedance measured at the relay detector input terminals is outside a certain range. This may be due to short-wiring or an open circuit or a disconnected RTD. The RTD monitoring board is faulty or wrongly fitted.
Action: Check that the RTD's declared in the RTD sub-menu [49/38] or THERMISTOR sub-menu [49] are correctly wired to the MiCOM relay. Check the connection wiring for each RTD (short-wiring, open circuit). After removing the withdrawable part, check that the RTD board is correctly connected to the rest of the relay. If the alarm persists, remove the withdrawable part and return it to the factory for repair.
P225/EN CM/B11 Page 12/18 6.2.5 BATTERY ERROR
This alarm appears if the 3.6 V Lithium battery located on the front panel is flat, missing or incorrectly positioned. Action: Check that the battery is present. Check the state of the battery (voltage higher than 3.5 V?). Check the state of the relay contacts between the battery and the CPU board. If the alarm persists, remove the withdrawable part and return it to the factory for repair. As this is a minor alarm, it is possible to disable monitoring (which clears the alarm) by setting "BATTERY ALARM" to NO (ALARM CONFIG. sub-menu.) 6.2.6 EEPROM ERROR DATA Hardware failure. Action: Remove the withdrawable part and return it to the factory for repair. 6.2.7 EEPROM ERROR CALIBR. Hardware failure. Action: Remove the withdrawable part and return it to the factory for repair. 6.2.8 CT/VT ERROR Hardware failure. Action: Remove the withdrawable part and return it to the factory for repair.
7.
7.1.1
PROBLEM SOLVING
Password lost or not accepted Problem: Password lost or not accepted Cause: MiCOM P225 relays are supplied with the password set to: AAAA This password can be changed by the user (refer to the OP. PARAMETERS menu). Action: There is an additional unique recovery password associated with the relay which can be supplied by the factory or service agent if provided with details of the model and serial number (under the upper flap on the front panel). Contact your Schneider Electric local dealer or the Schneider Electric After Sales Department with the serial number (phone: 33 (0)4 67 20 55 55).
7.1.2 7.1.2.1
Communication Values measured locally and remotely Problem: Values measured locally and remotely (via RS485 communication) differ. Cause: The values accessible on the front panel via the MEASUREMENT menus are refreshed every second. Those fed back via communication and accessible via the Schneider Electric setting software generally have settable refresh frequencies. If the refresh frequency of the supervision software differs from that of the MiCOM relay (1s), there may be a difference between the indicated values. Action: Adjust the refresh frequency for the measurements of the supervision software or the support software to 1 second.
7.1.2.2
MiCOM relay no longer responds Problem: No response from the MiCOM relay following a request by the supervision software: no communication fault message. Cause: Normally this type of problem is linked to a configuration error in the MiCOM relay communication parameters. Action: Check that the MiCOM relay communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are in accordance with the supervision software. Check the MiCOM relay network address. Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN. Check that the other devices on the same LAN respond to supervision requests.
P225/EN CM/B11 Page 14/18 7.1.2.3 A remote control signal is not taken into account Problem:
Communication between the relay and the PC is OK but the MiCOM relay will not accept remote control signals nor setting file downloads. Cause: Normally this type of problem is because the MiCOM relay is in programming mode, i.e. the user has entered the password. Action: Wait for deactivation of the password. Deactivation occurs 5 minutes after the keypad is last used.
8.
LIST OF THE RELAY ALARM MESSAGES

HARDW ALARMS Heading of the HARDW ALARMS messages, default display in case of either relay error alarm or RTDs/thermistor failure. To key. display the alarms messages, press the Communication error (communication suing the rear RS485 port). (Minor failure) EEPROM memory error. (Major failure) EEPROM calibration error. (Major failure) Analogue signal acquisition error. (Major failure) Internal clock error. (Minor failure) RAM memory error. (Minor failure) Analogue output error. (Minor failure) RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit). (Minor failure) 3,6 Volt battery alarm : battery off or bad-fitted (battery located in the relay front plate). (Minor failure)
COMM. ERROR
EEPROM ERROR DATA EEPROM ERROR CALIBR. CT/VT ERROR CLOCK ERROR RAM ERROR ANALOG OUTPUT ERROR RTD/Therm ERROR BATTERY ERROR
9.
LIST OF THE MOTOR ALARM MESSAGES

MOTOR ALARMS Heading of the MOTOR ALARMS messages, default display in case of motor alarm. To display the alarms messages, press the ! key. Operation of the thermal overload function. Thermal alarm element active : ALARM (self-resettable). Block start based on thermal criterion active (self resettable). Operation of the short-circuit function : time delayed element tI>>. Display of the faulty phase. t I0> t I0>> t I2> t I2>> LONG START t Istart MECHAN JAM t Istall LOCKED ROTOR t I< PHASE Operation of the earth fault function : time delayed element t Io> Operation of the earth fault function : time delayed element t Io>> Operation of the unbalance function : time delayed element tI2> Operation of the unbalance function : time delayed element tI2>> Operation of the excessive start time function : time delayed element tIstart Operation of the stalled rotor while running function : time delayed element tIstall Operation of the locked rotor at start function. Operation of the loss of load function : time delayed element t I< Display the faulty phase. t RTD1 ALARM t RTD1 TRIP Operation of the RTD1 temperature alarm element : time delayed element tRTD1 ALARM (self-resettable) Operation of the RTD1 temperature trip element : time delayed element tRTD1 TRIP, and so on for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5, RTD6, RTD7, RTD8, RTD9 and RTD10. Operation of the Thermist1 temperature element and so on for Thermist 2 and Thermist 3. Block start based on the limitation of starts number function active (self resettable) Block start based on the minimum time between 2 starts function active . (self-resettable). Authorised motor reacceleration sequence in progress (selfresettable) Operation of the auxiliary timer EXT 1.
TH OVERLOAD ALARM FORBIDDEN START t I >> PHASE
Thermist 1 START NB LIMIT T between 2 start RE-ACCELER AUTHOR EXT 1
Maintenance MiCOM P225 EXT 2 EQUATION A Operation of the auxiliary timer EXT 2. And logic equation A active
and so on for the AND logic equations B, C and D CB OPENING TIME CB OPERATION NB SAn t V< VOLTAGE DIP t V> BUS VOLTAGE Circuit breaker opening time has reached (or it has exceeded) the CB OPENING TIME threshold. Circuit breaker operation number has reached (or it has exceeded) the CB OPERATION NB threshold. The sum of amperesn has reached (or it has exceeded) the SAn threshold. Undervoltage default : tV< time delayed threshold. Load shedding further to a voltage dip. Overvoltage default : tV> time delayed threshold. Busbar voltage too low to enable a start. (self resettable alarm). ANTI BACK SPIN CB FAIL. TRIP CIRC. FAIL LATCH AUX OUTPUT RLY CLEAR ALL ALARMS. Block start due to Anti backspin function : minimum time between a motor stoppage and a re-start (self resettable alarm). Circuit breaker failure. Open trip circuit wiring. One or several output relays are latched energised. To clear all the alarms, press the " key.
PAGE BLANCHE
Communication MiCOM P225
P225/EN CT/B11
COMMUNICATION
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 1/52
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.7.4 1.8
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS communication characteristics MODBUS network characteristics Parameters of the MODBUS connection Synchronisation of exchange messages Message validity check Address of the MiCOM relays MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays Presentation of the MODBUS protocol Frame size received by the MiCOM P225 relay Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P225 relay Messages validity check Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM. Service request Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel Request to retrieve an index frame Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event Request to retrieve a dedicated event Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record
3
3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9
Modbus request definition used to retrieve both start-up current & voltage form record10 Request to know the number of current values stored into the saved memory Request to retrieve the start-up current form record data Request to know the number of voltage values stored into the saved memory Request to retrieve the start-up voltage form record data MiCOM P225 database organisation 10 10 10 10 11
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 2/52 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3 1.8.4 1.8.5 1.8.6 1.8.7 1.8.8 1.8.9 1.8.10 1.8.11 1.8.12 1.8.13 1.8.14 1.8.15 1.8.16 1.8.17 1.8.18 1.8.19 1.8.20 1.8.21 1.8.22 1.9 Description of the MODBUS application mapping
Communication MiCOM P225 11 12 16 23 26 29 29 29 30 31 32 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 36 36
Page 0 : Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements Page 1 : Remote settings for general parameters Page 2 : Remote settings for protection functions group No1 Page 3 : Remote settings for protection functions group No2 Page 4 : Remote controls Pages 5 and 6 : Reserved Page 7 : MiCOM P225 relay status word Page 8 : Synchronisation Page 9h to 21h : Disturbance record data (25 pages) Page 22h : Index frame for the disturbance records Page 23h to 33h : Start-up current form record data Page 34h : Index frame for the start-up current form record Page 35h : Event record data Page 36h : Data of the oldest event Page 37h : Fault value record data Pages 38h 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel Page 3Dh : Number of available disturbance records Page 3Eh : Data of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record Page 3Fh : Reserved Page 40h to 50h : Start-up voltage form record data Page 51h : Index frame for the start-up voltage form record Description of the mapping format
1.
MODBUS PROTOCOL
The MiCOM P225 relay offers MODBUSTM RTU mode communication via a rear RS485 port.
1.1 1.1.1
MODBUS communication characteristics MODBUS network characteristics The MODBUS protocol is based on the master-slave principle with the MiCOM P225 relay as slave. The MODBUS protocol allows the master to read and to write one or several bits, one or several words and to remote the event logging data. The access to the network can be : either according to a query/response principle
Master Response Query Equipment Slave
Equipment Slave
Equipment Slave
P0211ENa
or according to a broadcast message sent from the master to all the slaves.
Master
Broadcast message
Equipment Slave
Equipment Slave
Equipment Slave
P0212ENa
in that case : compulsory, the broadcast message is a writing order, the slaves return no response, the protocol is RTU mode. Each byte of the data frame is coded according to a hexadecimal base. At the end of each frame, two bytes of CRC16 validity checksum are applied on the whole of the frame content.
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 4/52 1.1.2 Parameters of the MODBUS connection The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows : Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz). MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode.
The baud rate can be configured by operator dialogue in the front panel of the relay :
Baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Transmission mode of the configurable parameters by operator dialogue :
Transmission mode 1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits 1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits 1 start / 8 bits / 2 stop : total 11 bits 1.1.3 Synchronisation of exchange messages Any character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a transmission time of 3 bytes is considered as a frame start. 1.1.4 Message validity check The validation of a trame is performed with a 16-bit cyclical redundancy check (CRC). The generator polynomial is : 1 + x + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h 1.1.5 Address of the MiCOM relays The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1 and 255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages.
Communication MiCOM P225 1.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are : Function 1 or 2 : Reading of n bits Function 3 or 4 : Reading of n words Function 5 : Writing of 1 bit Function 6 : Writing of 1 word Function 7 : Fast reading of 8 bits Function 8 : Reading of the diagnosis counters Function 11 : Reading of the Event counter Function 15 : Writing of n bits Function 16 : Writing of n words 1.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol
MODBUS is a master-slave protocol whereby every exchange involves a master query and a slave response. 1.3.1 Frame size received by the MiCOM P225 relay Frame transmitted by the master (query) : Slave number 1 byte 0 to FFh Slave number : The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code : Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16). Information : Contains the parameters of the selected function. CRC16 : Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master. NOTA : The MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent out by the master. Function code 1 byte 1 to 10h Information n bytes CRC16 2 bytes
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 6/52 1.3.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P225 relay Frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) : Slave number 1 byte 1 to FFh Slave number : The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code : Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16). Data : Contains the response data to master query. CRC16 : Value of the CRC16 calculated by the MiCOM relay. 1.3.3 Messages validity check When the MiCOM relay receives a master query, it validates the frame : Function code 1 byte 1 to 10h Data n bytes
CRC16 2 bytes
If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. The MiCOM relay does not reply to the query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this is the only case of non-reply by the MiCOM relay to a master query. If the CRC is correct but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sents to the master a exception response.
Exception frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) : Slave number 1 byte 1 to FFh Slave number : The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code : The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the exception frame is the code in which the most significant bit (bit7) is forced to 1. Error code : Among the 8 exception codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages two of them : code 01 : Function code unauthorised or unknown. code 03 : A value of the data field is unauthorised (incorrect code). CRC16: The CRC16 value is calculated by the slave. Control of pages being read. Control of pages being written. Control of address in pages. Length of request messages. Function code 1 byte Error code 1 byte CRC16 2 bytes LSB ... MSB
Communication MiCOM P225 1.4
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records To retrieve a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact given order : 1. 2. (optional) : Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available in the saved RAM. To retrieve the data of one channel: 2a (compulsory) : Send a service request specifying the record number and the channel number which have to be retrieved. 2b (compulsory) : Send requests to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel as many time as needed. 2c (compulsory) : send a request to retrieve the index frame. Process the same operation (as described in the item 2) for each channel.
3. 1.4.1
Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM. Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address 3Dh 00 Word number 00 24h CRC xx............xx
This request may be answered an error message with the error code : EVT_NOK (0F) : NOTA : 1.4.2 Service request This request shall be sent before to retrieve the sample data of a disturbance record channel. It allows to specify the record number and the channel number which have to be retrieved. It allows also to know the number of samples in the channel. Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address Word number 13h CRC xx............xx No record available.
If there are less than 5 records available, the answer will contain zero value in the non-used words.
Refer to mapping 00
This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible : CODE_DEF_RAM (02) : CODE_EVT_NOK (03) : 1.4.3 Saved RAM failure. No disturbance record available in the saved RAM.
Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address Word number CRC xx............xx
Refer to mapping 1 to 7Dh
This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible : CODE_DEP_DATA (04) : The requested sample number is superior than the number of samples in the specified channel.
CODE_SERV_NOK (05) : The record number and the channel number have not been specified by a service request. NOTA : This type of request can retrieve up to125 words. A sample is coded on 1 word (16 bits).
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 8/52 1.4.4 Request to retrieve an index frame Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address 22h 00
Word number 00 07h
CRC xx............xx
This event request may be answered an error message with the error code : CODE_SERV_NOK (05) : 1.5 The record number and the channel number have not been specified by a service request.
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record : Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.
1.5.1
Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address 36h 00 Word number 00 09h CRC xx............xx
This event request may be answered an error message with the error code : EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : NOTA : An event is being written into the saved RAM.
On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event record acknowledgement : - a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval. - b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged. b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 13 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. 1.5.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated event Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address Word number 09h CRC xx............xx
Refer to mapping 00
This event request may be answered an error message with the error code : EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : NOTA : An event is being written into the saved RAM.
This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.
Communication MiCOM P225 1.6 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record : 1.6.1
Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.
Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record Slave number xx NOTA : Function code 03h Word address 3Eh 00 Word number 00 10h CRC xx............xx
On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record acknowledgement: - a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval. - b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged. b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. 1.6.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record Slave number xx NOTA : Function code 03h Word address Word number 10h CRC xx............xx
Refer to mapping 00
This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 10/52 1.7
Modbus request definition used to retrieve both start-up current & voltage form record To retrieve both start-up current & voltage form record, process as described below : 1. 2. Send a request to know the number of values stored into the saved RAM. Send a request to retrieve the start-up record data relevant to current or voltage signal form.
1.7.1
Request to know the number of current values stored into the saved memory Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address 34H 00 Word number 00 03h CRC xx............xx
1.7.2
Request to retrieve the start-up current form record data Slave number xx NOTA : Function code 03h Word address Word number CRC xx............xx
Refer to mapping 004 to 7Ch
The number of requested words shall be a 2 multiple number as the value of a start-up current form record sample is coded on 4 bytes. One page of the mapping can stored up to 248 words.
1.7.3
Request to know the number of voltage values stored into the saved memory Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address 51h 00 Word number 00 03h CRC xx............xx
1.7.4
Request to retrieve the start-up voltage form record data Slave number xx NOTA : Function code 03h Word address Word number CRC xx............xx
Refer to mapping 04 to 7Ch
The number of requested words shall be a 2 multiple number as the value of a start-up voltage form record sample is coded on 4 bytes. One page of the mapping can stored up to 248 words.
Communication MiCOM P225 1.8 1.8.1 MiCOM P225 database organisation Description of the MODBUS application mapping The MODBUS mapping contains 60 pages. Pages 0 to 8 : Contain the MiCOM P225 parameters.
Pages 9 to 51h : Contain the data of the event records, data of the fault value records, data of the disturbance records and data of both start-up current & voltage form record. These pages are explained in the following way : Page No Page 0h Page 1h Page 2h Page 3h Page 4h Pages 5h & 6h Page 7h Page 8h Pages 9h to 21h Page 22h Page content Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements Remote settings for general parameters Remote settings for protection group number 1 Remote settings for protection group number 2 Remote controls Reserved page MiCOM P225 relay status word Synchronisation Disturbance record data Index frame for the disturbance records Access Reading Reading & writing Reading & writing Reading & writing Writing Not accessible Quick reading Writing Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Not accessible Reading Reading
Pages 23h to Start-up current form record data 33h Page 34h Page 35h Page 36h Page 37h Index frame for the start-up current form record Event record data Data of the oldest event Fault value record data
Pages 38h to Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its 3Ch channel Page 3Dh Page 3Eh Page 3Fh Number of available disturbance records Data of the oldest fault value record Reserved page
Pages 40h to Start-up voltage form record data 50h Page 51h Index frame for the start-up voltage form record
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 12/52 1.8.2
Page 0 : Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements Access only for reading
Address 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005
Group Product informations
Description Description of the relay characters 1 and 2 Description of the relay characters 3 and 4 Description of the relay characters 5 and 6 Factory reference characters 1 and 2 Factory reference characters 3 and 4 Software version Active setting group
Values range 32 -127 32-127 32-127 32-127 32-127 10 - xx 1-2
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
Unit
Format F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 F21 F1
Default value
P2 25 AL ST
0007 to 000E 000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A 001B Remotesignalings
Reserved Status of the MiCOM relay selftest Logic inputs Logic datas Internal logics Output relays Output information: threshold I>> Output information: threshold I0> Output information: threshold I0>> Output information: I2 > Output information:I2 >> Output information : I< Thermal image Information : Informations : EXT1, EXT2, EXT3, EXT4 timers and AND logical gates 0 to 31 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to 63 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F46 F12 F20 F22 F13 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F17 F33 F36
001C 001D 001E 001F 0020 0021
Informations : Excessive 0 to FFFF long start/stalled rotor Informations : RTD1 to RTD6 Number of available disturbance records Informations : RTD7 to RTD10 Trip output relay status (RL1) Circuit breaker monitoring flag 0 to FFFF 0 to 5 0 to FFFF 0 to 1
1 1 1 1 1
F34 F4 F55
F4 F1 F43

Values range

Default value
Address 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 002A 002B 002C 002D 002E 002F 0030 0032 0034 0036 0038 003A 003C
Group
Description Display alarm message : t I>> PHASE Display alarm message: t I< PHASE (Mini I) Display alarm messages Display alarm messages Display alarm messages Display alarm messages Reserved Output information: threshold V< Output information: VOLTAGE DIP Output information: threshold V>
Step
Unit
Format F17 F17 F41 F41 F41 F41
0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6
A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100
F17 F17 F17 F35 F17 F17 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3
Informations : CB FAIL, 0 to FFFF ABS and BUS VOLTAGE Display alarm message : 0 to FFFF tV< Display alarm message : 0 to FFFF tV> Phase A current IA RMS 0 to 12*106 Remotemeasurements Phase B current IB RMS 0 to 12*106 Phase Current IC RMS Neutral current IN RMS Negative sequence I2 current (fundamental) Positive sequence I1 current (fundamental) Zero sequence current (fundamental) I0 (1/3 * IN) Frequency 0 to 12*10 0 to 3*10
5 6
0 to 12*10
1 1 1
0 to 12*106 0 to 1*105
003E 003F 0040 0041 0042 0044 0046 0048 004A
4500 to 6500 1
6
1/100 Hz A/100 %
F1 F1
Phase current maximeter 0 to 12*10 I2/I1 ratio Line to line Voltage VAC 0 to 4*10 RMS Apparent power VAs Active Power WATTS Reactive Power VARs Active power consumption WATTHours
6
V/100 KVA/100 KW/100
F3 F3 F11
0 to 4,8*108 +/- 4,8*10

8
+/- 4,8*10 +/- 2*10

9
KVAR/100 F11 KWh/100 F11
004C 004E 004F
+/- 2*109 Reactive power consumption VAR-Hours Power Factor Reserved -100 to +100 1
KVARh/100 F11 1/100 F2

Values range

Default value
Address 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 005B 005C 005D 005E 005F 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 006A 006B to 006F 0070 0071
Group Process
Description Load current as % I> Thermal status value Reserved Time before thermal trip
Step % %
Unit
Format F1 F1
Seconds 1/10 C 1/10 C 1/10 C 1/10 C 1/10 C 1/10 C 1 1 Ohm Ohm seconds 0 to 120000 1 A seconds hours
F1 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F45
RTD1 temperature value -400 to 2000 RTD2 temperature value -400 to 2000 RTD3 temperature value -400 to 2000 RTD4 temperature value -400 to 2000 RTD5 temperature value -400 to 2000 RTD6 temperature value -400 to 2000 Thermistor 1 value Thermistor 2 value Number of authorised start-ups Time before an authorised start-up Last start current value Last start time value Total motor start number Total emergency start number Total motor running hours RTDs status RTD7 temperature value -400 to 2000 RTD8 temperature value -400 to 2000 RTD9 temperature value -400 to 2000 RTD10 temperature value -400 to 2000 Thermistor 3 value No Hottest RTD Reserved Trip Cause Statistics Reserved Total trip number (based on output relay No1 : RL1) Operator trip number (logic inputs, pushbuttons or remote communication) Thermal trip number Earth fault trip number (tIo>, tIo>>) Short-circuit trip number (tI>>) Excessive long start trip number (tIstart) 0 to 30000 1 to 10 1 1 0 to 30000 0 to 30000
1/10 C 1/10 C 1/10 C 1/10 C Ohm -
F2 F2 F2 F2 F1 F1
F1
0072
F1
0073 0074 0075 0076
F1 F1 F1 F1

Values range

Default value
Address 0077 0078 0079 007A 007B 007C 007D 007E 007F 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 008A 008B 008C 008D 008E 008F 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0099 009A 009B 009C
Group
Description Stalled rotor trip number (whilst running tIstall)) Locked rotor trip number (at start) Loss of load trip number (tI<) Unbalance trip number (tI2>, tI2>>) EQUATION A trip number EQUATION A trip number EQUATION A trip number EQUATION A trip number RTD1 trip number RTD2 trip number RTD3 trip number RTD4 trip number RTD5 trip number RTD6 trip number Thermistor 1 trip number Thermistor 2 trip number Thermistor 3 trip number Under voltage trip number (tV<) Over voltage trip number (tV>) RTD7 trip number RTD8 trip number RTD9 trip number RTD10 trip number VOLTAGE DIP trip number Reserved
Step -
Unit
Format F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
Fourier Magnitude
IA magnitude IB magnitude IC magnitude 3.I0 magnitude IA angle IB angle IC angle 3.I0 angle I1 magnitude I2 magnitude VAC voltage magnitude
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
Fourier Angle
Fourier Magnitude

Values range

Default value
Address 009D 009E - 009F
Group Fourier Angle
Description VAC voltage angle Reserved
Step -
Unit
Format F1
1.8.3
Page 1 : Remote settings for general parameters Access for reading and writing
Address 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 010A 010B 10C 010D 010E 010F 0110 0111 0112
Group Remotesettings
Description Address Reserved Password : and 2 Password : and 4 Frequency Default displayed value Motor start-up detection criterion Analogue output type Data transmitted on the analogue output n1 Active setting group User reference : characters 1 and 2 User reference : characters 3 and 4 Displayed fault record number Thermistor 1 type Thermistor 2 type RTDs type Thermistor 3 type Data transmitted on the analogue output n2 Configuration of the maximum analogue output n1 rating Configuration of the maximum analogue output n2 rating
Values range 1 to 255
Step 1 -
Unit
Format F1 1
Default value
characters 1 0x41 0x5a characters 3 0x41 0x5a 50-60 1-23 0-1 0 to 1 0 to 22 1-2 0x30 0x5a 0x30 0x5a 15 0-1 0-1 0-3 0-1 0 to 22 0 to 10
1 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hz -
F10 F10 F1 F26 F5
AA AA 50 1 0 0 0 1 MO T1 5 0 0 0 0 0 0=10 Kilo
F18 F7 F1
F10 F10 F39
F32 F32 F42 F32 F7
F47
0113
0 to 10
F47
0=10 Kilo
0114 0115 0116
Configuration of the logic 0-1 input active state Latching of the auxiliary output relays Configuration of the control voltage type for the logic inputs 0-15 0-1
1 1 1
F48 F14 F37
1 0 0

Values range

Default value 0
Address 0117
Group
Description 0-1 Configuration of both RAM ERROR & BATTERY ERROR alarm message Configuration of the way 0-1 to switch of active setting group Reserved
Step 1
Unit
Format F24
0118
F49
0119 to 011F 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 0125 CT/VT Ratio
Line CT primary Line CT secondary Earth/Gnd CT primary
1 to 3000 1 to 5 1 to 3000
1 4 1 4 1
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
1 1 1 1 57 or 220 57 or 220
Earth/Gnd CT secondary 1 to 5 Line VT primary Line VT secondary 1 to 20000
57 to 130 or 1 220 to 480
0126 to 012F 0130
Reserved Data rate Rear RS485 Communication Parity Reserved Stop bit 0 to 1 1 1 F31 F24 0 =1 bit 1= Communication available 0 to 7 1 F28 6= 19200 bauds 0= without
0131 0132 0133 0134
0 to 2
F29
Communication available 0 to 1
0135 to 013C 013D 013E 013F 0141 0143 0145 0146 to 014E 014F 0150 0152 0154 0156 0158
Reserved CB supervision CB operation number CB operating time S A IA (phase A) S A IB (phase B) S A IC (phase C) Configuration of the date 0 to 1 format Reserved Latching of the trip output 0 - 8191 relay (RL1) (2/2) LED allocation Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Auxiliary output t RTD10 ALARM relays allocation t RTD10 TRIP AND logical t RTD10 ALARM gates allocation 0 to 15 2n 2n 2 2 2
n n n n
1 1 1 1 1 1
sec/100 A A
n
F1 F1 F3 F3 F3 F44 1 = IEC
A -
F8 F19 F19 F19 F19
0 0 0 0 0 0
F14
0159 015A
0 to 15 0 to 15
1 1
F14 F14
0 0

Values range 0 to 15

Default value 0
Address 015B 015C 015D
Group
Description t RTD10 TRIP Reserved
Step 1
Unit
Format F14
Auxiliary output GROUP 2 ACTIVE relays allocation Logic inputs allocation Logic input L6 Logic input L2 Logic input L3 Logic input L4 Logic input L5 Auxiliary output ABS relays allocation CB FAIL TRIP CIRC. FAIL t RTD7 ALARM t RTD7 TRIP t RTD8 ALARM t RTD8 TRIP t RTD9 ALARM t RTD9 TRIP Thermist 3 tV< (time delayed)
0 to 15
F14
015E 015F 0160 0161 0162 0163
0 to 2n 0 to 2n 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2
n
1 -
F15 F15 F15 F15 F15 F14
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 to 15
0164 0165 0166 0167 0168 0169 016A 016B 016C 016D 016E 016F 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 017A 017B 017C 017D
0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VOLTAGE DIP tV> (time delayed) Thermal overload : THERM OV. Thermal alarm : ALARM Thermal start inhibition FORBID. START I0> (instantaneous) tI0> (time delayed) I0>>(instantaneous) tI0>>(time delayed) I>> (instantaneous) tI>> (time delayed) tI2> (time delayed)
F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14
tI2>> (time delayed) Excessive long start : EXCES LG START Stalled rotor (whilst running): t Istall Locked rotor (at start): LOCKED ROTOR

Values range 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15

Default value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Address 017E 017F 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 0185 0186 0187 0188 0189 018A 018B 018C 018D 018E 018F 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 019A 019B 019C 019D 019E 019F
Group
Description Loss of load : t I< (time delayed) Start number limitation START NB LIMIT Time between 2 start: T betw 2 start t RTD1 ALARM t RTD1 TRIP t RTD2 ALARM t RTD2 TRIP t RTD3 ALARM t RTD3 TRIP t RTD4 ALARM t RTD4 TRIP t RTD5 ALARM t RTD5 TRIP t RTD6 ALARM t RTD6 TRIP Thermist 1 Thermist 2 EXT 1 EXT 2 CLOSE ORDER TRIP ORDER ORDER 1 ORDER 2 SUCCESS START AND logical gate A: t EQU. A AND logical gate B: t EQU. B AND logical gate C t EQU. C AND logical gate D t EQU. D CB opening time : CB OPEN TIME CB operation number : CB OPER NB Ampsn cut by CB : S An EXT 3 EXT 4 BUS VOLTAGE
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
Unit
Format F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14

Values range 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15

Default value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Address 01A0 01A1 01A2 01A3 01A4 01A5 01A6 01A7 01A8 01A9 01AA 01AB 01AC 01AD 01AE 01AF 01B0 01B1 01B2 01B3 01B4 01B5 01B6 01B7 01B8 01B9 01BA 01BB 01BC 01BD 01BE 01BF 01C0 01C1 01C2 01C3 01C4 01C5 01C6
Group
Description
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Unit
Format F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14
AND logical Thermal overload : gates allocation THERM OV. Thermal alarm : ALARM FORBIDDEN START I0> tI0> (instantaneous) (time delayed)
I0>> ( instantaneous) tI0>> (time delayed) I>> (instantaneous) tI>> (time delayed) tI2> (time delayed)
tI2>> (time delayed) Excessive long start : EXCES LG START Stalled rotor (running): t Istall Locked rotor (at start): LOCKED ROTOR Loss of load : t I< (time delayed) CB FAIL TRIP CIRC. FAIL t RTD1 ALARM t RTD1 TRIP t RTD2 ALARM t RTD2 TRIP t RTD3 ALARM t RTD3 TRIP t RTD4 ALARM t RTD4 TRIP t RTD5 ALARM t RTD5 TRIP t RTD6 ALARM t RTD6 TRIP Thermist 1 Thermist 2 EXT 1 EXT 2 SUCESS START EXT 3 EXT 4 t RTD7 ALARM t RTD7 TRIP t RTD8 ALARM

Values range 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15

Default value 0 0 0 0
Address 01C7 01C8 01C9 01CA 01CB 01CC 01CD 01CE 01CF 01D0
Group
Description t RTD8 TRIP t RTD9 ALARM t RTD9 TRIP Thermist 3 Reserved tV< (time delayed)
Step 1 1 1 1
Unit
Format F14 F14 F14 F14
0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 65535
1 1 1 1 2
n
F14 F14 F14 F14 F6
0 0 0 0 0
VOLTAGE DIP tV> (time delayed)
BUS VOLTAGE Automation Control functions Trip output relay assignment (RL1) Trip output relay assignment (RL1)
01D1 01D2 01D3 01D4 01D5 01D6 01D7 01D8 01D9 01DA
0 to 8191
2n 2n 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 minute minute minute -
F6 F8 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F24
0 0 0 10 0 1 1 0 1 0
Latching of the trip output 0 to 65535 relay (RL1) (1/2) Function : Start number limitation Reference time : Treference Hot start number Cold start number Start interdiction time : Tinterdiction Function : Time between 2 starts T betw 2 start Function : Reacceleration authorization Voltage dip duration : Treacc Function : CB Opening time ? CB OPENING TIME threshold Function : CB Operation number ? CB OPERATION NB threshold Ampsn cut by CB function ? : S An SAn threshold n exponent value TRIP T duration value (remote order) 01 10 120 0 5 1-5 1-120 0 to 1 1 to 120 0-1
01DB 01DC 01DD 01DE 01DF 01E0 01E1 01E2 01E3 01E4
10-1000 0-1 5 to 100 0-1 0-50000 0-1 0 to 4000 1 to 2 20 to 500
1 1 1 1 1 1
1/100 sec 1/100 sec 10e6 A^n
F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 F3 F1 F1 F1
10 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 20 20
1 5 5
1 1/100 sec 1/100 sec
CLOSE T duration value 20 to 500 (remote order)

Values range 0 to 20000 0 to 20000 1 to 25 1 to 25 01

Default value 0 0 1 1 0
Address 01E5 01E6 01E7 01E8 01E9
Group Logic inputs
Description EXT1 time delay EXT2 time delay
Step 1 1 1 1 1
Unit 1/100 sec 1/100 sec 1/10 sec 1/10 sec
Format F1 F1 F1 F1 F40
Disturbance record
Pre-time Post-time Disturbance record trigging criterion : DISTUR REC TRIG
01EA 01EB 01EC
Logic inputs
EXT3 time delay EXT4 time delay
0 to 20000 0 to 20000
1 1
1/100 sec 1/100 sec 1/10 V
F1 F1 F1
0 0 50 or 200
Automation Control functions
Voltage dip detection threshold : Detection V DIP Voltage restoration detection threshold : Restoration V DIP Function : ABS ? tABS timer
50 to 1300 or 1 200 to 4800 50 to 1300 or 1 200 to 4800 0-1 1-7200 0 to 36000 1 1 1
01ED
1/10 V
F1
50 or 200
01EE 01EF 01F0
sec 1/10 sec
F24 F1 F1
0 1 0
AND logical AND logical gate A operation time delay : gates timers EQU. A Toperat AND logical gate A reset time delay : EQU. A Treset AND logical gate B operation time delay : EQU. B Toperat AND logical gate B reset time delay : EQU. B Treset AND logical gate C operation time delay : EQU. C Toperat AND logical gate C reset time delay : EQU. C Treset AND logical gate D operation time delay : EQU. D Toperat AND logical gate D reset time delay : EQU. D Treset Reserved
01F1
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
01F2
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F3
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F4
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F5
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F6
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F7
0 to 36000
1/10 sec
F1
01F8
01F9
Automation Control functions
Function : TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION ? tSUP timer Function :CB FAIL ? I< BF threshold tBF timer
0-1
F24
01FA 01FB 01FC 01FD
10 to 1000 0-1 10 to 100 3 to 1000
1 1 1 1
1/100 sec F1 F24 % In F1
10
10 3
1/100 sec F1

Values range

Default value
Address
Group
Description
Step
Unit
Format
01FE 01FF
Function : BUS 0-1 VOLTAGE CONTROL ? V BUS threshold 50 to 1300 or 200 to 4800
1 1 1/10 V
F24 F1 50 or 200
1.8.4
Page 2 : Remote settings for protection functions group No1 Access for reading and writing
Address 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 020A 020B 020C to 020F 0210 0211 0212 0213 to 021F 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 0225 0226 to 022E 022F 0230 0231 0232
Group Protection group 1
Description
Values range 1 1
Step -
Unit
Format F24 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F24 F1 F24 F1 0 0
Default value
Thermal overload function 0-1 Thermal inhibition at start : INHIBIT Thermal current threshold : I> Ke factor Thermal constant time Te1 Thermal constant time Te2 0-1 20 to 150 0 to 10 1 to 180 1 to 360
1/100 In 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Minute Minute Minute % %
20 3 1 1 1 0 0 20 0 20 -
Cooling constant time Tr 1 to 999 RTD1 influence : RTD1 INFLUENCE Thermal alarm function ALARM threshold Thermal start inhibition function FORBID START Reserved I>> function I>> threshold tI>> time delay Reserved I0> function I0> threshold tI0> time delay I0>> function I0>> threshold tI0>> time delay Reserved TMS I2>> I2> function I2> threshold tI2> time delay 200 to 2000 0-1 40 to 800 0-1 2 to 1000 0-1 2 to 120 0-1 0-1 20 to 100 0-1 20 to 100
1 1
In/10 1/100 s
F24 F1 F1
0 2 0 -
0 to 10000 1
1 1
F24
0 2 0 0 2 0 -
1/1000 Ion F1 1/100 s F1 F24
0 to 10000 1 0-1 2 to 1000 1 1
1/1000 Ion F1 1/100 s F1
0 to 10000 1
25 1 10
1/1000 1/1000 In 1/100 s
F1 F24 F1 F1
1000 0 40 0
0 to 20000 1

Values range 0-1 40 to 800 0-1 1 10 1

Default value 0 40 0 50 or 200
Address 0233 0234 0235 0236
Group
Description I2>> function I2>> threshold V< function V< threshold
Step -
Unit
Format F24 F1 F24 F1
1/1000 In 1/10V
50 to 1300 1 or 200 to 4800 0 to 60000 1 0-1 1
0237 0238 0239 to 023C 023D 023E
tV< time delay V< inhibition at start : INHIB V< Reserved V> function V> threshold
1/100 sec -
F1 F24 -
0 0 0 0 50 or 200
0-1
1/10V
F24 F1
50 to 2600 1 ou 5 or 200 to 9600 0 to 60000 1 0-1 1 5 1
023F 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 0245 0246 0247 0248 0249 to 024F 0250 0251 0252 0253 0254 to 0255 0256 0257 0258 0259 025A 025B 025C 025D 025E 025F
tV> time delay Excessive long start function
1/100 sec 1/10 I Second
F1 F24 F1 F1 -
0 0 10 1 0 1 0 10 0 -
Istart detection threshold 10 to 50 t Istart time delay Reserved Blocked rotor function t Istall time delay Stalled rotor function Istall detection threshold Locked rotor at start function Reserved I< function I< threshold t I< time delay Tinhib inhibition time Reserved RTD10 function 0-1 0-1 10 to 100 2 to 1000 0 1 1 600 0 1 10 to 50 0-1 1 to 200
1 1 1 5 1
1/10 sec 1/10 I -
F24 F1 F24 F1 F24
1 1 1
1/100 In 1/10 sec 1/100 sec
F24 F1 F24 F1
0 10 2 5 -
5 to 30000 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec
F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RTD10 ALARM threshold 0-200 t RTD10 ALARM time delay RTD10 TRIP threshold 0 to 1000 0-200
t RTD10 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 RTD9 function RTD9 ALARM threshold t RTD9 ALARM time delay RTD9 TRIP threshold t RTD9 TRIP time delay 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000

Values range 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0 1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 1-300 0-1 1-300 0-1 1-300 0-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Default value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Address 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 026A 026B 026C 026D 026E 026F 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 027A 027B 027C 027D 027E 027F 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284
Group
Description RTD1 function RTD1 ALARM threshold t RTD1 ALARM time delay RTD1 TRIP threshold t RTD1 TRIP time delay RTD2 function RTD2 ALARM threshold t RTD2 ALARM time delay RTD2 TRIP threshold t RTD2 TRIP time delay RTD3 function RTD3 ALARM threshold t RTD3 ALARM time delay RTD3 TRIP threshold t RTD3 TRIP time delay RTD4 function RTD4 ALARM threshold t RTD4 ALARM time delay RTD4 TRIP threshold t RTD4 TRIP time delay RTD5 function RTD5 ALARM threshold t RTD5 ALARM time delay RTD5 TRIP threshold t RTD5 TRIP time delay RTD6 function RTD6 ALARM threshold t RTD6 ALARM time delay RTD6 TRIP threshold t RTD6 TRIP time delay Thermistor 1 function Thermistor 1 threshold Thermistor 2 function Thermistor 2 threshold Thermistor 3 function Thermistor 3 threshold RTD7 function
Step C
Unit
Format F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F24
1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec 1/10 k 1/10 k 1/10 k -

Values range 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Default value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
Address 0285 0286 0287 0288 0289 028A 028B 028C 028D 028E to 028F
Group
Description RTD7 ALARM threshold t RTD7 ALARM time delay RTD7 TRIP threshold t RTD7 TRIP time delay RTD8 function RTD8 ALARM threshold t RTD8 ALARM time delay RTD8 TRIP threshold t RTD8 TRIP time delay Reserved
Step C
Unit
Format F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1
1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec
1.8.5
Page 3 : Remote settings for protection functions group No2 Access for reading and writing
Address 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 030A 030B 030C to 030F 0310 0311 0312 0313 to 031F 0320 0321 0322 0323
Group Protection group 2
Description
Values range 1 1
Step -
Unit
Format F24 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F24 F1 F24 F1 0 0
Default value
Thermal overload function 0-1 Thermal inhibition at start : INHIBIT Thermal current threshold : I> Ke factor Thermal constant time Te1 Thermal constant time Te2 0-1 20 to 150 0 to 10 1 to 180 1 to 360
1/100 In 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Minute Minute Minute % %
20 3 1 1 1 0 0 20 0 20 -
Cooling constant time Tr 1 to 999 RTD1 influence : RTD1 INFLUENCE Thermal alarm function ALARM threshold Thermal start inhibition function FORBID START Reserved I>> function I>> threshold tI>> time delay Reserved I0> function I0> threshold tI0> time delay I0>> function 0-1 2 to 1000 0-1 2 to 120 0-1 0-1 20 to 100 0-1 20 to 100
1 1
In/10 1/100 s
F24 F1 F1
0 2 0 -
0 to 10000 1
1 1
F24
0 2 0 0
1/1000 Ion F1 1/100 s F1 F24
0 to 10000 1 0-1 1

Values range 2 to 1000 1

Default value 2 0 200 to 2000 0-1 40 to 800 25 1 10 1/1000 1/1000 In 1/100 s 1/1000 In 1/10V F1 F24 F1 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 1000 0 40 0 0 40 0 50 or 200
Address 0324 0325 0326 to 032E 032F 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 0335 0336
Group
Description I0>> threshold tI0>> time delay Reserved TMS I2>> I2> function I2> threshold tI2> time delay I2>> function I2>> threshold V< function V< threshold
Step
Unit
Format
1/1000 Ion F1 1/100 s F1
0 to 10000 1
0 to 20000 1 0-1 40 to 800 0-1 1 10 1
50 to 1300 1 or 200 to 4800 0 to 60000 1 0-1 1
0337 0338 0339 to 033C 033D 033E
tV< time delay V< inhibition at start : INHIB V< Reserved V> function V> threshold
1/100 sec -
F1 F24 -
0 0 0 0 50 or 200
0-1
1/10V
F24 F1
50 to 2600 1 ou 5 or 200 to 9600 0 to 60000 1 0-1 1 5 1
033F 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 0345 0346 0347 0348 0349 to 034F 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 to 0355 0356 0357 0358
tV> time delay Excessive long start function
1/100 sec 1/10 I Second
F1 F24 F1 F1 -
0 0 10 1 0 1 0 10 0 -
Istart detection threshold 10 to 50 t Istart time delay Reserved Blocked rotor function t Istall time delay Stalled rotor function Istall detection threshold Locked rotor at start function Reserved I< function I< threshold t I< time delay Tinhib inhibition time Reserved RTD10 function 0-1 0-1 10 to 100 2 to 1000 0 1 1 600 0 1 10 to 50 0-1 1 to 200
1 1 1 5 1
1/10 sec 1/10 I -
F24 F1 F24 F1 F24
1 1 1
1/100 In 1/10 sec 1/100 sec
F24 F1 F24 F1
0 10 2 5 -
5 to 30000 5
1 1 1
C 1/10 sec
F24 F1 F1
0 0 0
RTD10 ALARM threshold 0-200 t RTD10 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

Values range 0-200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Default value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Address 0359 035A 035B 035C 035D 035E 035F 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 0365 0366 0367 0368 0369 036A 036B 036C 036D 036E 036F 0370 0371 0372 0373 0374 0375 0376 0377 0378 0379 037A 037B 037C
Group
Description RTD10 TRIP threshold
Step C
Unit
Format F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1
t RTD10 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 RTD9 function RTD9 ALARM threshold t RTD9 ALARM time delay RTD9 TRIP threshold t RTD9 TRIP time delay RTD1 function RTD1 ALARM threshold t RTD1 ALARM time delay RTD1 TRIP threshold t RTD1 TRIP time delay RTD2 function RTD2 ALARM threshold t RTD2 ALARM time delay RTD2 TRIP threshold t RTD2 TRIP time delay RTD3 function RTD3 ALARM threshold t RTD3 ALARM time delay RTD3 TRIP threshold t RTD3 TRIP time delay RTD4 function RTD4 ALARM threshold t RTD4 ALARM time delay RTD4 TRIP threshold t RTD4 TRIP time delay RTD5 function RTD5 ALARM threshold t RTD5 ALARM time delay RTD5 TRIP threshold t RTD5 TRIP time delay RTD6 function RTD6 ALARM threshold t RTD6 ALARM time delay RTD6 TRIP threshold 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0 1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 1000 0-200
1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C

Values range 0 to 1000 0-1 1-300 0-1 1-300 0-1 1-300 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0 to 1000 0-200 0 to 1000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Default value 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
Address 037D 037E 037F 0380 0381 0382 0383 0384 0385 0386 0387 0388 0389 038A 038B 038C 038D 038E to 038F
Group
Description t RTD6 TRIP time delay Thermistor 1 function Thermistor 1 threshold Thermistor 2 function Thermistor 2 threshold Thermistor 3 function Thermistor 3 threshold RTD7 function RTD7 ALARM threshold t RTD7 ALARM time delay RTD7 TRIP threshold t RTD7 TRIP time delay RTD8 function RTD8 ALARM threshold t RTD8 ALARM time delay RTD8 TRIP threshold t RTD8 TRIP time delay Reserved
Step
Unit 1/10 sec 1/10 k 1/10 k 1/10 k C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec
Format F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1
1.8.6
Page 4 : Remote controls Access in writing
Address 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404
Group Remote control
Description Remote control word 1 Reserved Remote control word 3 Remote control word 2 Remote control of the output relays under Maintenance mode only
Values range 0 to 31 1
Step -
Unit
Format F9 0
Default value
0-1 0 to 63
1 1
F9 F38
0 0
1.8.7 1.8.8
Pages 5 and 6 : Reserved Page 7 : MiCOM P225 relay status word Access for quick reading
Address 0700
Group Quick reading byte
Description Quick reading byte
Values range 1
Step -
Unit
Format F23 0
Default value
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 30/52 1.8.9 Page 8 : Synchronisation Access in writing. It exists 2 possible date format configurations : 1.8.9.1 IEC format : Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a Private format
Mapping for IEC format : The format of the clock synchronisation is coded on 8 bytes (4 words).
Words 1 2 3 4 0 0
7 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
5 0 0
4 0
3 0
2 0
1 0
Value range 00..99 1..12 1..7 1..31 0..23 0..59
Year Day of week iv 0 Day of Month Minutes Millisecond LSB
Month Hours
Su
Millisecond MSB 215 su = 0 :Standard iv = 0 : valid 28 27
0..59999 20 (s) + (ms)
su = 1 : Summer Time iv =1 : non valid or non synchronised in system case
Communication MiCOM P225 1.8.9.2 Mapping for PRIVATE format : The format of the clock synchronisation is coded on 8 bytes (4 words). Clock Year LSB + MSB Months Days Hours Minutes ms LSB + MSB 1.8.10 @page 8 8 8 8 8 8 byte number 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 - 12 1 - 31 0 - 23 0 - 59
Value range
Unit Year Month Day Hour Minute ms
0 - 59999
Page 9h to 21h : Disturbance record data (25 pages) Access in reading. Each page of the mapping contains 250 words. Address 0900 to 09FAh 0A00 to 0AFAh 0B00 to 0BFAh 0C00 to 0CFAh 0D00 to 0DFAh 0E00 to 0EFAh 0F00 to 0FFAh 1000 to 10FAh 1100 to 11FAh 1200 to 12FAh 1300 to 13FAh 1400 to 14FAh 1500 to 15FAh 1600 to 16FAh 1700 to 17FAh 1800 to 18FAh 1900 to 19FAh 1A00 to 1AFAh 1B00 to 1BFAh 1C00 to 1CFAh 1D00 to 1DFAh 1E00 to 1EFAh 1F00 to 1FFAh 2000 to 20FAh 2100 to 21FAh N.B. : Contents 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data Format F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58
The above disturbance record data pages of the mapping contains the data for only one record channel.
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 32/52 1.8.11 Page 22h : Index frame for the disturbance records Access in reading. Address 2200h 1.8.12 Contents Index frame for the disturbance records
Format F50
Page 23h to 33h : Start-up current form record data Access in reading. Address 2300 to 23F8h 2400 to 24F8h 2500 to 25F8h 2600 to 26F8h 2700 to 27F8h 2800 to 28F8h 2900 to 29F8h 2A00 to 2AF8h 2B00 to 2BF8h 2C00 to 2CF8h 2D00 to 2DF8h 2E00 to 2EF8h 2F00 to 2FF8h 3000 to 30F8h 3100 to 31F8h 3200 to 32F8h 3300 to 330Fh Contents 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 16 values Format
1.8.13
Page 34h : Index frame for the start-up current form record Access in reading. Address 3400h 3401h 3402h Contents Number of available values of the start-up current form record Number of the last page Format F51 F51
Number of available values stored in the last F51 page
Communication MiCOM P225 1.8.14 Page 35h : Event record data Access in reading. Address 3500h 3501h 3502h 3503h 3504h 3505h 3506h 3507h 3508h 3509h 350Ah 350Bh 350Ch 350Dh 350Eh 350Fh 3510h 3511h 3512h 3513h 3514h 3515h 3516h 3517h 3518h 1.8.15 Contents EVENT n1 EVENT n2 EVENT n3 EVENT n4 EVENT n5 EVENT n6 EVENT n7 EVENT n8 EVENT n9 Format Address Contents F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 3519h 351Ah 351Bh 351Ch 351Dh 351Eh 351Fh 3520h 3521h 3522h 3523h 3524h 3525h 3526h 3527h 3528h 3529h 352Ah 352Bh 352Ch 352Dh 352Eh 352Fh 3530h 3531h Format
Address Contents 3532h 3533h 3534h 3535h 3536h 3537h 3538h 3539h 353Ah 353Bh 353Ch 353Dh 353Eh 353Fh 3540h 3541h 3542h 3543h 3544h 3545h 3546h 3547h 3548h 3549h 354Ah
Format
EVENT n26 F52 EVENT n27 F52 EVENT n28 F52 EVENT n29 F52 EVENT n30 F52 EVENT n31 F52 EVENT n32 F52 EVENT n33 F52 EVENT n34 F52 EVENT n35 F52 EVENT n36 F52 EVENT n37 F52 EVENT n38 F52 EVENT n39 F52 EVENT n40 F52 EVENT n41 F52 EVENT n42 F52 EVENT n43 F52 EVENT n44 F52 EVENT n45 F52 EVENT n46 F52 EVENT n47 F52 EVENT n48 F52 EVENT n49 F52 EVENT n50 F52
EVENT n51 F52 EVENT n52 F52 EVENT n53 F52 EVENT n54 F52 EVENT n55 F52 EVENT n56 F52 EVENT n57 F52 EVENT n58 F52 EVENT n59 F52 EVENT n60 F52 EVENT n61 F52 EVENT n62 F52 EVENT n63 F52 EVENT n64 F52 EVENT n65 F52 EVENT n66 F52 EVENT n67 F52 EVENT n68 F52 EVENT n69 F52 EVENT n70 F52 EVENT n71 F52 EVENT n72 F52 EVENT n73 F52 EVENT n74 F52 EVENT n75 F52
EVENT n10 F52 EVENT n11 F52 EVENT n12 F52 EVENT n13 F52 EVENT n14 F52 EVENT n15 F52 EVENT n16 F52 EVENT n17 F52 EVENT n18 F52 EVENT n19 F52 EVENT n20 F52 EVENT n21 F52 EVENT n22 F52 EVENT n23 F52 EVENT n24 F52 EVENT n25 F52
Page 36h : Data of the oldest event Access in reading. Address 3600h Contents Data of the oldest event Format F52
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 34/52 1.8.16 Page 37h : Fault value record data Access in reading. Address 3700h 3701h 3702h 3703h 3704h 1.8.17 Contents Data of the fault value record n1 Data of the fault value record n2 Data of the fault value record n3 Data of the fault value record n4 Data of the fault value record n5
Format F53 F53 F53 F53 F53
Pages 38h 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel Access in reading. Address 3800h 3801h 3802h 3803h 3804h 3805h 3806h 3900h 3901h 3902h 3903h 3904h 3905h 3906h 3A00h 3A01h 3A02h 3A03h 3A04h 3A05h 3A06h 3B00h 3B01h 3B02h 3B03h 3B04h 3B05h Disturbance record number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 Channel I A (phase A current) I B (phase B current) I C (phase C current) I N (neutral current) Frequency Logic inputs and logic outputs Format F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54
V AC (phase Aphase C voltage) F54 I A (phase A current) I B (phase B current) I C (phase C current) I N (neutral current) Frequency Logic inputs and logic outputs F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54
Communication MiCOM P225 Disturbance record number 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Address 3B06h 3C00h 3C01h 3C02h 3C03h 3C04h 3C05h 3C06h 1.8.18
Channel
Format
V AC (phase Aphase C voltage) F54
Page 3Dh : Number of available disturbance records Access in reading. Address 3D00h Contents Number of available disturbance records Format F55
1.8.19
Page 3Eh : Data of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record Access in reading. Address 3E00h Contents Data of the oldest fault value record Format F53
1.8.20 1.8.21
Page 3Fh : Reserved Page 40h to 50h : Start-up voltage form record data Access in reading. Address 4000 to 40F8h 4100 to 41F8h 4200 to 42F8h 4300 to 43F8h 4400 to 44F8h 4500 to 45F8h 4600 to 46F8h 4700 to 47F8h 4800 to 48F8h 4900 to 49F8h 4A00 to 4AF8h 4B00 to 4BF8h 4C00 to 4CF8h 4D00 to 4DF8h Contents 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values Format
P225/EN CT/B11 Page 36/52 Address 4E00 to 4EF8h 4F00 to 4FF8h 5000 to 500Fh 1.8.22 Contents 124 values 124 values 16 values
Communication MiCOM P225 Format
Page 51h : Index frame for the start-up voltage form record Access in reading. Address 5100h 5101h 5102h Contents Number of available values of the start-up voltage form record Number of the last page Number of available values stored in the last page Format F51 F51 F51
1.9
Description of the mapping format

CODE DESCRIPTION unsigned integer numerical data 1 65535 signed integer numerical data 32768 to +32767 unsigned Long integer numerical data 0 to 4294967925 Unsigned integer RTD/thermistor monitoring function status RTD1 to RTD6 Bit 0 : t RTD1 ALARM signal or Thermist1 signal Bit 1 : t RTD1 TRIP signal or Thermist2 signal Bit 2 : t RTD2 ALARM signal or Thermist3 signal Bit 3 : t RTD2 TRIP signal Bit 4 : t RTD3 ALARM signal Bit 5 : t RTD3 TRIP signal Bit 6 : t RTD4 ALARM signal Bit 7 : t RTD4 TRIP signal Bit 8 : t RTD5 ALARM signal Bit 9 : t RTD5 TRIP signal Bit 10 : t RTD6 ALARM signal Bit 11 : t RTD6 TRIP signal Bits 13 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer RTD/thermistor monitoring function status RTD7 to RTD10 Bit 0 : t RTD7 ALARM signal Bit 1 : t RTD7 TRIP signal Bit 2 : t RTD8 ALARM signal Bit 3 : t RTD8 TRIP signal Bit 4 : t RTD9 ALARM signal Bit 5 : t RTD9 TRIP signal Bit 6 : t RTD10 ALARM signal Bit 7 : t RTD10 TRIP signal Bits 8 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Motor start-up detection criterion Bit 0 : Closing of the CB (52A) Bit 1 : Closing of the CB and overshoot of the Istart current threshold (52A + Istart)
F1 F2 F3 F4
F4
F5
CODE F6
DESCRIPTION Unsigned long : Trip output relay assignment (RL1) bit 0 : tI>> bit 1 : tI0> Bit 2 : tI0>> Bit 3 : tI2> Bit 4 : tI< (loss of load) Bit 5 : THERM OVERLOAD (Thermal overload) Bit 6 : EXCES LONG START (Excessive long start) Bit 7 : t Istall (Stalled rotor whilst running) Bit 8 : LOCKED ROTOR (locked rotor at start) Bit 9 : t RTD1 TRIP or Thermist1 Bit 10 : t RTD2 TRIP or Thermist2 Bit 11 : t RTD3 TRIP or Thermist3 Bit 12 : t RTD4 TRIP Bit 13 : t RTD5 TRIP Bit 14 : t RTD6 TRIP Bit 15 : t RTD 10 TRIP Bit 0 : t I2>> Bit 1 : EXT 1 Bit 2 : EXT 2 Bit 3 : Equation A ( AND logical gate A) Bit 4 : Equation B ( AND logical gate B) Bit 5 : Equation C ( AND logical gate C) Bit 6 : Equation D ( AND logical gate D) Bit 7 : t RTD7 TRIP Bit 8 : t RTD8 TRIP Bit 9 : t RTD9 TRIP Bit 10 : t V< Bit 11 : VOLTAGE DIP Bit 12 : t V> Bits 13 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Data transmitted on the analogue outputs 0 : IA RMS 1 : IB RMS 2 : IC RMS 3 : IN RMS 4 : THERM ST (thermal state) 5 : % I LOAD (load in % of full load current) 6 : Tbef START (time before a permitted start) 7 : Tbef TRIP (time before a thermal trip) 8 : V AC RMS (phase Aphase C voltage) 9 : POWER FACT 10 : WATTs 11 : VARs 12 : TC RTD1 13 : TC RTD2 14 : TC RTD3 15 : TC RTD4 16 : TC RTD5 17 : TC RTD6 18 : TC RTD7 19 : TC RTD8 20 : TC RTD9 21 : TC RTD10 22 : No Hottest RTD Unsigned integer : Latching of the trip output relay (RL1) Bit 0 : tI>> Bit 1 : tI0> Bit 2 : tI0>> Bit 3 : tI2> Bit 4 : tI< Bit 5 : THERM OVERLOAD (Thermal overload) Bit 6 : EXCES LONG START (Excessive long start) Bit 7 : t Istall (Stalled rotor whilst running)
F6
F7
F8
CODE
DESCRIPTION Bit 8 : LOCKED ROTOR (locked rotor at start) Bit 9 : t RTD1 TRIP or Thermist1 Bit 10 : t RTD2 TRIP or Thermist2 Bit 11 : t RTD3 TRIP or Thermist3 Bit 12 : t RTD4 TRIP Bit 13 : t RTD5 TRIP Bit 14 : t RTD6 TRIP Bit 15 : t RTD 10 TRIP Bit 0 : t I2>> Bit 1 : EXT 1 Bit 2 : EXT 2 Bit 3 : Equation A ( AND logical gate A) Bit 4 : Equation B ( AND logical gate B) Bit 5 : Equation C ( AND logical gate C) Bit 6 : Equation D ( AND logical gate D) Bit 7 : t RTD7 TRIP Bit 8 : t RTD8 TRIP Bit 9 : t RTD9 TRIP Bit 10 : t V< Bit 11 : VOLTAGE DIP Bit 12 : t V> Bits 13 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Remote control word 1 Bit 0 : Remote delocking of the trip output relay (RL1) Bit 1 : Remote alarm acknowledgement Bit 2 : Remote TRIP ORDER Bit 3 : Remote CLOSE ORDER Bit 4 : Remote EMERGENCY START Bit 5 : Remote order to change of active setting group Bit 6 : Remote ORDER 1 Bit 7 : Remote ORDER 2 Bit 8 : Remote trigging of disturbance record Bit 9 : Remote maintenance mode enabling order Bit 10 : Remote maintenance mode disabling order Bit 11 : Remote thermal state value reset Bit 12 : Non automatic event/fault record acknowledgement on record retrieval Bit 13 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged event record Bit 14 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record Bit 15 : Remote acknowledgement of the RAM memory error alarm Unsigned integer : Remote control word 3 Bit 0 to 1 : Reserved Bit 2 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged disturbance record ASCII characters 32 127 = ASCII character1 32 127 = ASCII character 2 Longer integer : numerical data 2 147 483 648 to + 2 147 483 647 Unsigned integer : Logic inputs status Bit 0 : Logic input 1 (CB/contactor status : 52a) Bit 1 : Logic input 2 Bit 2 : Logic input 3 Bit 3 : Logic input 4 Bit 4 : Logic input 5 Bit 5 : Logic input 6 Unsigned integer : Output relays status Bit 0 : Output relay 1 (trip output relay) Bit 1 : Output relay 2 Bit 2 : Output relay 3 Bit 3 : Output relay 4 Bit 4 : Output relay 5 Bit 5 : Watchdog relay
F8
F9
F9
F10
F11 F12
F13
CODE F14
DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer : Auxiliary output relays allocation Bit 0 : Allocation to relay 2 Bit 1 : Allocation to relay 3 Bit 2 : Allocation to relay 4 Bit 3 : Allocation to relay 5 Bits 4 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : AND logical gates allocation Bit 0 : Allocation to equation A Bit 1 : Allocation to equation B Bit 2 : Allocation to equation C Bit 3 : Allocation to equation D Bits 4 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer :Logic inputs allocation. Bit 0 : EMERG ST (emergency start) Bit 1 : SET GROUP (change from one protection setting group to another) Bit 2 : SPEED SW (speed switch locked rotor detection at start-up) Bit 3 : DIST TRIG (trigging of a disturbance recording) Bit 4 : EXT RESET (external reset) Bit 5 : EXT 1 (auxiliary 1 timer) Bit 6 : EXT 2 (auxiliary 2 timer) Bit 7 : EXT 3 (auxiliary 3 timer) Bit 8 : EXT 4 (auxiliary 4 timer) Bit 9 : RESET (thermal state value reset) Bit 10 : TRIP CIRC (trip circuit wiring supervision) Bits 11 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Earth fault and unbalance protection information Bits 0 to 4: reserved Bit 5 : Instantaneous signal (I0> or I0>>) bit 6 : Time delayed signal (tI0> or tI0>> or tI2> or tI2>>) Bits 7 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Short-circuit and loss of load protection information Bit 0 : Any phase, overshoot of the I>> threshold signal or VOLTAGE DIP signal Bit 1 : Phase A signal , overshoot of the I>> threshold Bit 2 : Phase B signal, overshoot of the I>> threshold Bit 3 : Phase C signal, overshoot of the I>> threshold Bit 4 : reserved Bit 5 : Instantaneous signal I>> or V< or V> Bit 6 : Time delayed signal tI>> or tI< or tV< or tV> Bits 7 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Analogue output type 0 : 4-20 mA 1 : 0-20 mA
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
CODE F19
DESCRIPTION Unsigned long : LED allocation Bit 0 : ALARM (thermal alarm) Bit 1 : THERM OVERLOAD (thermal overload) Bit 2 : tI0> Bit 3 : tI0>> Bit 4 : t I >> Bit 5 : tI2> Bit 6 : tI2>> Bit 7 : tI< Bit 8 : EXCES LONG START Bit 9 : t Istall (stalled rotor whilst running) Bit 10 : LOCKED ROTOR (at start) Bit 11 : EMERG RESTART (emergency restart) Bit 12 : FORBIDDEN START Bit 13 : t RTD1,2,3 ALARM Bit 14 : t RTD1,2,3 TRIP or Thermist1, 2, 3 Bit 15 : t RTD4 ,5 ,6 ALARM Bit 16 : t RTD4 ,5 ,6 TRIP Bit 17 : TRIP CIRCUIT FAIL (trip circuit wiring in failure) Bit 18 : EXT 1 Bit 19 : EXT 2 Bit 20 : MOTOR STOPPED Bit 21 : MOTOR RUNNING Bit 22 : SUCCESSFUL START Bit 23 to 24 : reserved Bit 25 : t RTD7 ,8 ,9 ,10 ALARM Bit 26 : t RTD7 ,8 ,9 ,10 TRIP Bit 27 : tV< Bit 28 : VOLTAGE DIP (load shedding further a voltage dip) Bit 29 : tV> Bit 30 : BUS VOLTAGE (bus voltage too low to enable a start) Bit 31 : CB FAIL (CB failure) Unsigned integer : Status of the information assigned to the logic inputs Bit 0 : Emergency start Bit 1 : Change from one protection setting group to another Bit 2 : reserved Bit 3 : CB/Contactor status (52a interlock) : open = 0 close = 1 Bit 4 : Trigging of a disturbance recording Bit 5 : Speed switch signal Bit 6 : External reset Bit 7 : Auxiliary timer EXT 1 Bit 8 : Auxiliary timer EXT 2 Bit 9 : Auxiliary timer EXT 3 Bit 10 : Auxiliary timer EXT 4 Bit 11 : reserved Bit 12 : Thermal state value reset Bits 13 to 14 : reserved Bit 15 : Trip circuit supervision Unsigned integer : Software version most significant digit : software version number lost significant digit : software version letter 10 : 1.A version 11 : 1.B version 20 : 2.A version 32 : 3.C version Unsigned integer : Internal logic status Bit 0 : Trip output relay latched (RL1) Bit 1 : reserved
F20
F21
F22
CODE F23
DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer : Quick reading byte Bit 0 : General MiCOM relay status Bit 1 : Minor relay failure Bit 2 : Presence of a non-acknowledged event record Bit 3 : Clock synchronisation status Bit 4 : Presence of a non-acknowledged disturbance record Bit 5 : Presence of a non-acknowledged fault record Bits 6 to 15 : reserved 0 : Function out of service 1 : Function in service 2 : ASCII characters Default displayed value 1 : IA RMS 2 : IB RMS 3 : IC RMS 4 : IN RMS 5 : THERM ST (Thermal state) 6 : % I LOAD (load in % of full load current) 7 : Tbef START (time before a permitted start) 8 : Tbef TRIP (time before a thermal trip) 9 : V AC RMS (phase Aphase C voltage) 10 : POWER FACT 11 : WATTs 12 : VARs 13 : TC RTD1 14 : TC RTD2 15 : TC RTD3 16 : TC RTD4 17 : TC RTD5 18 : TC RTD6 19 : TC RTD7 20 : TC RTD8 21 : TC RTD9 22 : TC RTD10 23 : No Hottest RTD Reserved Unsigned integer : Baudrate 0 : 300 1 : 600 2 : 1200 3 : 2400 4 : 4800 5 : 9600 6 : 19200 7 : 38400 Unsigned integer : parity 0 : Without 1 : Even 2 : Odd Reserved Unsigned integer : Stop bit 0 : 1 stop bit 1 : 2 stop bits Unsigned integer : Thermistor type 0 : PTC 1 : NTC Unsigned integer : Thermal image information Bit 0 : ALARM signal (thermal alarm) Bit 1 : THERM OV. signal (thermal overload) Bit 2: FORBID START signal (prohibited start due to thermal criteria) Bits 3 to 15 : reserved
F24 F25 F26
F27 F28
F29
F30 F31
F32
F33
CODE F34
DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer : Start sequence and stalled/locked rotor information Bit 0 : Start sequence in progress signal Bit 1 : Successful start signal Bit 2 : Excessive long start signal Bit 3 : Stalled rotor whilst running signal Bit 4 : Locked rotor at start signal Bit 5 : Overshoot of the permitted hot starts number signal Bit 6 : Overshoot of the permitted cold starts number signal Bit 7 : Limitation of the starts number signal Bit 8 : Minimum time between two starts signal Bit 9 : Prohibiting start signal Bit 10 : reserved Bit 11 : Re-acceleration phase in progress signal Bit 12 : reserved Bit 13 : Overshoot of the Istall threshold signal Bit 14 : Motor running signal Bit 15 : Detection V DIP threshold signal Unsigned integer : CB Fail, Busbars Voltage Control, ABS functions information Bit 0 : ABS signal Bit 1 : CB FAIL signal Bit 2 : Phase A open Pole signal Bit 3 : Phase B open Pole signal Bit 4 : Phase C open Pole signal Bit 5 : BUS VOLTAGE signal Bits 6 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : EXT1EXT4 timers and AND logical gates information Bit 0 : EXT1 timer signal Bit 1 : EXT2 timer signal Bit 2 : Equation A signal Bit 3 : Equation B signal Bit 4 : Equation C signal Bit 5 : Equation D signal Bit 6 : reserved Bit 7 : EXT3 timer signal Bit 8 : EXT4 timer signal Bits 9 to 15 : reserved Control voltage type necessary to power on the logic inputs 0 : Direct voltage (DC) 1 : Alternating voltage (AC) Unsigned integer : Remote control word 2 - Remote control of the output relays under Maintenance mode only Bit 0 : Output relay 1 (trip output relay) Bit 1 : Output relay 2 Bit 2 : Output relay 3 Bit 3 : Output relay 4 Bit 4 : Output relay 5 Bit 5 : Watchdog relay Unsigned integer : Displayed fault record number 0 : reserved 1 : Fault record n1 2 : Fault record n2 3 : Fault record n3 4 : Fault record n4 5 : Fault record n5 Disturbance record trigging criterion 0 : ON INST : Overshoot of a current or voltage threshold (I>>, I0>, I0>>, V< or V>) 1 : ON TRIP : Relay n1 operation (trip output relay operation : RL1)
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
CODE F41
DESCRIPTION Display alarm messages Bit 0 a : TH OVERLOAD (thermal overload) Bit 1 a : t Io> Bit 2 a : t Io>> Bit 3 a : t I2> Bit 4 a : t I2>> Bit 5 a : LONG START tIstart Bit 6 a : MECHAN JAM tIstall (whilst running) Bit 7 a : LOCKED ROTOR (at start) Bit 8 a : t RTD 1 TRIP Bit 9 a : t RTD 2 TRIP Bit 10 a : t RTD 3 TRIP Bit 11 a : t RTD 4 TRIP Bit 12 a : t RTD 5 TRIP Bit 13 a : t RTD 6 TRIP Bit 14 a : Thermist 1 Bit 15 a : Thermist 2 Bit 0 b : EXT 1 Bit 1 b : EXT 2 Bit 2 b : EQUATION A Bit 3 b : EQUATION B Bit 4 b : EQUATION C Bit 5 b : EQUATION D Bit 6 b : ALARM (thermal alarm) Bit 7 b : t RTD 1 ALAR Bit 8 b : t RTD 2 ALAR Bit 9 b : t RTD 3 ALAR Bit 10 b : t RTD 4 ALAR Bit 11 b : t RTD 5 ALAR Bit 12 b : t RTD 6 ALAR Bit 13 b : FORBIDDEN START Bit 14 b : START NB LIMIT Bit 15 b : T between 2 start Bit 0 c : RE-ACCELER AUTHOR (re-acceleration in progress) Bit 1 c : CB OPENING TIME (CB opening time) Bit 2 c : CB OPERTION NB (CB operation number) n Bit 3 c : SA2n ( Amps cut by CB) Bit 4 c : Thermist 3 Bit 5 c : t RTD 7 TRIP Bit 6 c : t RTD 8 TRIP Bit 7 c : t RTD 9 TRIP Bit 8 c : t RTD 7 ALAR Bit 9 c : t RTD 8 ALAR Bit 10 c : t RTD 9 ALAR Bit 11 c : CB FAIL Bit 12 c : TRIP CIRC. FAIL Bit 13 c : VOLTAGE DIP Bit 14 c : BUS VOLTAGE Bit 15 c : ANTI BACK SPIN Bit 0 d : t RTD 10 ALAR Bit 1 d : t RTD 10 TRIP RTD type 0 : Pt100 type 1 : Ni 120 type 2 : Ni 100 type 3 : Cu 10 type Circuit breaker monitoring flag Bit 0 : CB opening time signal Bit 1 : CB operation number signal n Bit 2 : Amps cut by CB signal Datation format 0 : Private format 1 : IEC format
F41
F41
F41 F42
F43
F44
CODE F45
DESCRIPTION RTD status Bit 0 : RTD1 failure or thermistance 1 failure Bit 1 : RTD2 failure or thermistance 2 failure Bit 2 : RTD3 failure or thermistance 3 failure Bit 3 : RTD4 failure Bit 4 : RTD5 failure Bit 5 : RTD6 failure Bit 6 : RTD board error Bit 7 : RTD7 failure Bit 8 : RTD8 failure Bit 9 : RTD9 failure Bit 10 : RTD10 failure Unsigned integer : Status of the MiCOM relay selftest Bit 0 : ANALOG OUTPUT ERROR (Analogue output error) Bit 1 : COMM. ERROR (Communication error) Bit 2 : EEPROM ERROR DATA (EEPROM memory error) Bit 3 : CT/VT ERROR (Analogue signals acquisition error) Bit 4 : CLOCK ERROR (Internal clock error) Bit 5 : EEPROM ERROR CALIBR. (EEPROM calibration error) Bit 6 : RAM ERROR (RAM memory error) Bit 7 : RTD/Therm ERROR (short-wiring or open circuit) Bit 8 : BATTERY ERROR (3,6 Volt battery fitted in the relay frontplate) Bits 9 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Maximum analogue output rating for power data : 0 : 10K 1 : 50K 2 : 100K 3 : 200K 4 : 500K 5 : 1M 6 : 10M 7 : 100M 8 : 500M 9 : 1G 10 :4G Unsigned integer : Configuration of the logic input active state 0 : inactive state when control voltage is applied on. 1 : active state when control voltage is applied on. Bit 0 : Logic input 1 Bit 1 : Logic input 2 Bit 2 : Logic input 3 Bit 3 : Logic input 4 Bit 4 : Logic input 5 Bit 5 : Logic input 6 Configuration of the way to switch of active setting group 0 : PICK-UP 1 : LEVEL st 1 word : Disturbance record number 2nd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994..lsb (low significant bit) 3rd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994..msb (most significant bit) 4th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)..lsb (low significant bit) 5th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)..msb (most significant bit) 6th word :Cause of the disturbance record trigging 1 : Relay n1 operation 2 : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, Io>, Io>>, V< or V>) 3 : Remote trig 4 : Trig order received through a logic input 7th word : Frequency st 1 word : Number of available values in the start-up current & voltage form record 2nd word : Address of the last page containing significant record data 3rd word : Word number contained in the last page (containing significant record data)
F46
F47
F48
F49
F50
F51
CODE F52
DESCRIPTION 1st word : event type : Refer to format F56 nd 2 word : associated value type : Refer to format F56 rd 3 word : mapping address of the associated value 4th word : reserved 5th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994lsb 6th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994..msb 7th word : event occurrence date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 8th word : event occurrence date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 9th word: acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged event ; 1 = acknowledged event)
st 1 word : Fault record number 2nd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/1994.lsb (low significant bit) 3rd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/1994.msb (most significant bit) th 4 word : Fault date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 5th word : Fault date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 6th word : Fault date (season) : (0 = winter,1 = summer, 2 = non defined) 7th word : Active setting group while the fault occurrence : (1 or 2) 8th word :Faulty phase : ( 0 =none, 1 = phase A, 2 = phase B, 3 = phase C, 4 = phases A-B, 5 = phases AC, 6 = phases B-C, 7 = phases A-B-C, 8 = earth, 9 = V A-C voltage) th 9 word : Cause of the fault record : Refer to format F57 10th word : Fault value magnitude (fundamental value) : Refer to format F59 th 11 word : Phase A current magnitude (True RMS value) : Refer to format F59 12th word : Phase B current magnitude (True RMS value) : Refer to format F59 th 13 word : Phase C current magnitude (True RMS value) : Refer to format F59 14th word : Earth current magnitude (True RMS value) : Refer to format F59 th 15 word : Phase A-Phase C voltage magnitude (True RMS value) : Refer to format F59 16th word : Acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged fault record; 1 = acknowledged fault record) st 1 word : Samples number containing in the mapping 2nd word : Pre-time sample number 3rd word : Post-time sample number 4th word : Primary line CT value 5th word : Secondary line CT value 6th word : Primary earth CT value 7th word : Secondary earth CT value 8th word : Ratio of the internal phase CT 9th word : Ratio of the internal earth CT 10th word : Primary line VT value ..lsb (low significant bit) 11th word : Primary line VT value ..msb (most significant bit) 12th word : Secondary line CT value 13th to 15th words : reserved 16th word : Ratio of the internal voltage numerator (100) 17th word : Ratio of the internal voltage denominator (12600 or 3400) 16 bits ADC th 18 word : Address of the last page containing samples 19th word : Word number contained in the last page (containing samples)
F53
F54
CODE F55
DESCRIPTION
st 1 word : Number of disturbance record available 2nd word : Oldest disturbance record number 3rd word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994 ..lsb (low significant bit) 4th word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994: number of seconds since the 01/01/1994 ..msb (most significant bit) 5th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 6th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) th 7 word : Cause of the oldest disturbance record : 1 : Relay n1 operation 2 : Overshoot of a current or voltage threshold (I>>, Io>, Io>>, V< or V>) 3 : Remote trig 4 : Trig order received through a logic input 8th word : Acknowledgement 9th word : Previous disturbance record number 10th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994 ..lsb (low significant bit) 11th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994 ..msb (most significant bit) 12th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 13th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 14th word : Cause of the previous disturbance record : 1 : Relay n1 operation 2 : Overshoot of a current or voltage threshold (I>>, Io> or Io>>, V< or V>) 3 : Remote trig 4 : Trig order received through a logic input 15th word : Acknowledgement and so on regarding the other disturbance records.

Associated value type F9 F9 F60 MODBUS address of the modified value
Code F56 00 01 02 03 04
Event type "No EVENT" "REMOTE CLOSING" "REMOTE TRIPPING" DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGING SETTING CHANGE
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
"I >>" "I0 >"
(instantaneous signal) (instantaneous signal)
F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F17 F33 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F33 F33 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F17 F34 F34 F34 F34 F34 F34 F34 F34 F34 F36 F36 F36 F36 F36
"I0 >>" (instantaneous signal) "I2 >" (instantaneous signal)
"I2 >>" (instantaneous signal) "I <" (instantaneous signal)
"THERMAL ALARM" "t RTD1 ALARM" "t RTD2 ALARM" "t RTD3 ALARM" "t RTD4 ALARM" "t RTD5 ALARM" "t RTD6 ALARM" "THERMAL OVERLOAD" "THEMAL FORBIDDEN START" "t I >>" "t I0 >" (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal)
"t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) "t I2 >" (time delayed signal)
"t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) "t I <" (time delayed signal)
"REACCELERATION IN PROGRESS" "EMERGENCY START" "START-UP DETECTION" "MOTOR HALTED" "EXCESSIVE START TIME" "STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" "LOCKED ROTOR AT START" "START NUMBER LIMITATION" "MINIMUM TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS" "EXT 1" "EXT 2" "EQUATION A" "EQUATION B" "EQUATION C" "EQUATION D"

Associated value type F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F43 F43 F43 F33 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F17 F34 F34 F34 F36 F36 F36 F36 F36 F36 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F12 F46 F46 (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal)
Code F56 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82
Event type "t RTD1 TRIP" "t RTD2 TRIP" "t RTD3 TRIP" "t RTD4 TRIP" "t RTD5 TRIP" "t RTD6 TRIP" "THERMISTOR 1" "THERMISTOR 2" "CB OPENING TIME ALARM" "CB OPERATION NUMBER ALARM" "CB SAn ALARM" "TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD" "TRIPPING : t I >>" "TRIPPING : t I0 >"
"TRIPPING : t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) "TRIPPING : t I2 >" "TRIPPING : t I2 >>" "TRIPPING : t I <" (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal)
"TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE START TIME" " TRIPPING : STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" "TRIPPING : LOCKED ROTOR AT START" "TRIPPING : EXT 1" "TRIPPING : EXT 2" "TRIPPING : EQUATION A" "TRIPPING : EQUATION B" "TRIPPING : EQUATION C" "TRIPPING : EQUATION D" "TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD2 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD3 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD4 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD5 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD6 TRIP" "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1" "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2" "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM USING KEYPAD" "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS USING KEYPAD" "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM" "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS" "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC INPUTS STATUS" "MAJOR RELAY FAILURE "MINOR RELAY FAILURE"

Associated value type F13 F36 F36 F17 F17 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F17 F17 F17 F35 F35 F35 F43 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F17 F17 F9 F38
Code F56 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117
Event type "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC OUTPUTS STATUS" "EXT 3" "EXT 4" Reserved "V <" (instantaneous signal)
Reserved "V >" (instantaneous signal)
"t RTD7 ALARM" "t RTD8 ALARM" "t RTD9 ALARM" "t RTD10 ALARM" "t RTD7 TRIP" "t RTD8 TRIP" "t RTD9 TRIP" "t RTD10 TRIP" "THERMISTOR 3" "t V <" (time delayed signal)
Reserved "t V >" (time delayed signal)
ACTIVE SETTING GROUP CHANGE BUS VOLTAGE ANTI BACK SPIN CB. FAIL VOLTAGE DIP TRIP CIRC. FAIL "TRIPPING : t RTD7 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD8 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD9 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD10 TRIP" "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 3" "TRIPPING : t V<" "TRIPPING : t V>" (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal)
LATCHING OF THE OUTPUT RELAYS MAINTENANCE MODE ACTIVE OUTPUT RELAY REMOTE CONTROL UNDER MAINTENANCE MODE
NOTA :
The double arrow means the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance. On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 1 . On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 0 .

Code F57 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Fault origin " NO FAULT " REMOTE TRIPPING" " TRIPPING : t I >>" (time delayed signal) " TRIPPING : t I0 >" (time delayed signal) " TRIPPING : t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) " TRIPPING : t I2 >" (time delayed signal) " TRIPPING : t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) " TRIPPING : t I <" (time delayed signal) " TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE LONG START " " TRIPPING : STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING " " TRIPPING : LOCKED ROTOR AT START " " TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD " " TRIPPING : EXT 1" " TRIPPING : EXT 2" " TRIPPING : EQUATION A" " TRIPPING : EQUATION B" " TRIPPING : EQUATION C" " TRIPPING : EQUATION D" " TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD2 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD3 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD4 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD5 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD6 TRIP " " TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1" " TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2" " TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 3" " TRIPPING : t RTD7 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD8 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD9 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD10 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t V<" (time delayed signal) " TRIPPING : VOLTAGE DIP" " TRIPPING : t V>" (time delayed signal)

Conversion rules for the current values of the disturbance record F58
* In order to obtain the phase current value at phase CT primary, apply the following formula : Primary phase current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary phase CT value x 2 / 800
* In order to obtain the earth current value at the earth CT primary, apply the following formula : Primary earth current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary earth CT value x 2 / 32700
* In order to obtain the phase-phase voltage value at the line VT primary, apply the following formula : Primary voltage value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary VT/Secondary VT ratio x 2 x (100/internal voltage denominator ratio
With : internal voltage denominator ratio = 12600 for 57-130 V voltage input range internal voltage denominator ratio = 3400 for 220-480 V voltage input range
Conversion rules for the current values of the fault data record F59 * In order to obtain the phase current value at phase CT primary, apply the following formula : Primary phase current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary phase CT value / 800
* In order to obtain the negative sequence component value of the current at phase CT primary, apply the following formula : Primary negative current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary phase CT value / 800
* In order to obtain the earth current value at the earth CT primary, apply the following formula : Primary earth current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary earth CT value / 32700
* In order to obtain the phase-phase voltage value at the line VT primary, apply the following formula : - For 57-130 V voltage input range Primary voltage value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary VT value / 127576 - For 220-480 V voltage input range Primary voltage value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary VT value / 3406
CODE F60
DESCRIPTION Origin of the disturbance record trigging Bit 0 : Overshoot of a current or voltage threshold (I>>, I0>, I0>>, V< or V>) Bit 1 : Relay n1 operation (trip output relay operation : RL1) Bit 2 : Remote control (using communication) Bit 3 : Logic input (programmed on DIST TRIG)
BLANK PAGE
Setting MiCOM P225
P225/EN SV/B11
SETTING
Setting MiCOM P225
P225/EN SV/B11 Page 1/16
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 1.4.7 1.4.8 1.4.9 1.4.10 1.4.11 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 1.5.8
DEFAULT SETTING VALUES

OP PARAMETERS menu CONFIGURATION menu CONFIG. SELECT submenu CT/VT RATIO submenu LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 sub-menu ALARM CONFIG. submenu INPUT CONFIG. submenu COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION MODBUS Menu COMMUNICATION Courier Menu COMMUNICATION IEC60870-5-103 Menu PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu [50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu [46] UNBALANCE submenu [27] UNDERVOLTAGE submenu [59] OVERVOLTAGE submenu [48] EXCES LONG START submenu [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional) AUTOMAT. CTRL MENU [66] START NUMBER submenu MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu INPUTS submenu AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu LATCH AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu
TM
3
3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 11 11 13
P225/EN SV/B11 Page 2/16 1.5.9 1.5.10 1.5.11 1.5.12 1.5.13 1.5.14 1.6 1.6.1 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu (RL1 relay latching on) CB FAIL submenu ABS (anti backspin) submenu BUS VOLTAGE CTRL submenu CB SUPERVISION submenu CONSIGNATION Menu DISTURB RECORD submenu
Setting MiCOM P225 13 14 14 14 14 15 15 15
Setting MiCOM P225
1.
DEFAULT SETTING VALUES

The MiCOM P225 relay leaves the factory with the following default setting values :
1.1
OP PARAMETERS menu Password Reference Frequency AAAA ALST 50 Hz
1.2 1.2.1
CONFIGURATION menu CONFIG. SELECT submenu Way to change active setting group Active setting group Default display Start detection criterion Analogue output type (optional) Value transmitted by the analogue output 1 (optional) Value transmitted by the analogue output 2 (optional) RTD type (optional) Thermistor 1 type (optional) Thermistor 2 type (optional) Thermistor 3 type (optional) LEVEL 1 IA RMS (phase A current) 52A (closing of the CB) 4 - 20 mA IA RMS (phase A current) IA RMS (phase A current) PT100 PTC PTC PTC
1.2.2
CT/VT RATIO submenu Line CT primary Line CT secondary Earth/Ground CT primary Earth/Ground CT secondary Line VT primary Line VT secondary 1 1 1 1 57 (A range) 220 (B range) 57 (A range) 220 (B range)
P225/EN SV/B11 Page 4/16 1.2.3 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 sub-menu
Setting MiCOM P225
LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 Allocation : Thermal overload : THERM OVERLOAD Allocation : Thermal alarm : ALARME Allocation : tI>> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tI2> Allocation : tI2>> Allocation : tI< Allocation : Excessive long start : EXCES LONG START Allocation : Stalled rotor while running : tIstall Allocation : Locked rotor at start : LOCKED ROTOR Allocation : Emergency restart : EMERG RESTART Allocation : Forbidden start : FORBIDDEN START Allocation : t RTD1 ALARM, t RTD2 ALARM, t RTD3 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD1 TRIP, t RTD2 TRIP, t RTD3 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD4 ALARM, t RTD5 ALARM, t RTD6 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD4 TRIP, t RTD5 TRIP, t RTD6 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD7 ALARM, t RTD8 ALARM, t RTD9 ALARM, t RTD10 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD7 TRIP, t RTD8 TRIP, t RTD9 TRIP, t RTD10 TRIP (optional) No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Allocation : Thermist 1, Thermist 2 and Thermist 3 (optional) No Allocation : EXT1 Allocation : EXT2 Allocation : Motor halted : MOTOR STOPPED Allocation : Motor running : MOTOR RUNNING Allocation : Successful start : SUCCESSFUL START Allocation : tV< Allocation : Load shedding further to a voltage dip : VOLTAGE DIP Allocation : tV> Allocation : Bus voltage too low to enable a start : BUS VOLTAGE Allocation : CB failure : CB FAIL. Allocation : Open trip circuit : TRIP CIRCUIT FAIL 1.2.4 ALARM CONFIG. submenu Presence of alarm message on RAM/battery error : BATTERY ALARM No No No No No No No No No No No
NO
Setting MiCOM P225 1.2.5 INPUT CONFIG. submenu
EL 6 EL 5 EL 4 EL 3 EL 2 EL 1 Configuration of the logic input active state : INPUT PICK-UP (1 : active state when a control voltage is applied on) Control voltage type for the logic inputs : CONTROL VOLT 1.3 1.3.1 COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION MODBUSTM Menu Communication enabled ? Baud rate Parity Number of stop bits Relay address Date format configuration 1.3.2 COMMUNICATION Courier Menu Communication enabled ? Relay address 1.3.3 COMMUNICATION IEC60870-5-103 Menu Communication enabled ? Baud rate Relay address 1.4 1.4.1 PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 Thermal overload function enabled ? Threshold I> Ke Te1 Te2 Tr RTD1 influence (optional) Thermal alarm enabled ? Thermal alarm ALARM threshold Block start on thermal base function enabled ? FORBID START threshold No No No 0,2 In 3 1 minute 1 minute 1 minute No No 20 % No 20 % Yes 19200 Bauds 1 Yes 255 Yes 19 200 Bauds None 1 1 IEC 1 1 1 1 1 1
DC (direct current voltage Vdc)
Thermal inhibition on starting function enabled ? No 0,2 In 3 1 minute 1 minute 1 minute No No 20 % No 20 %
P225/EN SV/B11 Page 6/16 1.4.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu
Setting MiCOM P225
PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 Short-circuit function enabled ? Threshold I>> tI>> 1.4.3 [50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 Io> element of the earth fault function enabled ? Threshold Io> tIo> Io>> element of the earth fault function enabled ? Threshold Io>> tIo>> 1.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 I2> element of the unbalance function enabled ? Threshold I2> tI2> I2>> element of the unbalance function enabled ? Time multiplier setting TMS I2>> Threshold I2>> 1.4.5 [27] UNDERVOLTAGE submenu PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 Undervoltage function enabled ? Threshold V< tV< Inhibition V< at start 1.4.6 [59] OVERVOLTAGE submenu PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 Overvoltage function enabled ? Threshold V> tV> 1.4.7 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 Excessive long start function enabled ? Threshold Istart tIstart No 1 I 1 second No 1 I 1 second No 5 V (range A) 20 V (range B) 0 second No 5 V (range A) 20 V (range B) 0 second No 5 V (range A) 20 V (range B) 0 second No No 5 V (range A) 20 V (range B) 0 second No No 0,04 In 0 second No 1 0,04 In No 0,04 In 0 second No 1 0,04 In No 0,002 In 0 second No 0,002 In 0 second No 0,002 In 0 second No 0,002 In 0 second No 0,2 In 0 second No 0,2 In 0 second
Setting MiCOM P225 1.4.8 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu
PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 Block rotor function enabled ? tIstall Stalled rotor while running function enabled ? Threshold Istall Locked rotor at start function enabled ? 1.4.9 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 Loss of load function enabled ? Threshold I< tI< Tinhib 1.4.10 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 RTD1 supervision function enabled ? RTD1 ALARM tRTD1 ALARM RTD1 TRIP tRTD1 TRIP RTD2 supervision function enabled ? RTD2 ALARM tRTD2 ALARM RTD2 TRIP tRTD2 TRIP RTD3 supervision function enabled ? RTD3 ALARM tRTD3 ALARM RTD3 TRIP tRTD3 TRIP RTD4 supervision function enabled ? RTD4 ALARM tRTD4 ALARM RTD4 TRIP tRTD4 TRIP RTD5 supervision function enabled ? RTD5 ALARM tRTD5 ALARM RTD5 TRIP No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C No 0,1 In 0,2 second 0,05 second No 0,1 In 0,2 second 0,05 second No 0,1 second No 1 I No No 0,1 second No 1 I No
Setting MiCOM P225 PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2
tRTD5 TRIP RTD6 supervision function enabled ? RTD6 ALARM tRTD6 ALARM RTD6 TRIP tRTD6 TRIP RTD7 supervision function enabled ? RTD7 ALARM tRTD7 ALARM RTD7 TRIP tRTD7 TRIP RTD8 supervision function enabled ? RTD8ALARM tRTD8 ALARM RTD8 TRIP tRTD8 TRIP RTD9 supervision function enabled ? RTD9 ALARM tRTD9 ALARM RTD9 TRIP tRTD9 TRIP RTD10 supervision function enabled ? RTD10 ALARM tRTD10 ALARM RTD10 TRIP tRTD10 TRIP 1.4.11 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional)
0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second
0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second
PROTECTION G 1 PROTECTION G 2 Thermistor 1 supervision function enabled ? Thermist 1 Thermistor 2 supervision function enabled ? Thermist 2 Thermistor 3 supervision function enabled ? Thermist 3 No 0,1 k No 0,1 k No 0,1 k No 0,1 k No 0,1 k No 0,1 k
Setting MiCOM P225 1.5 1.5.1 AUTOMAT. CTRL MENU [66] START NUMBER submenu Start Number Limitation function enabled ? Treference Hot start number Cold start number Tinterdiction 1.5.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu Time Between Start function enabled ? T betw 2 start 1.5.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu Re-acceleration authorisation function enabled ? Voltage dip detection threshold : Detection V DIP Voltage restoration threshold : Restoration V DIP VOLTAGE DIP DURAT Treacc 1.5.4 INPUTS submenu Allocation input n2 Allocation input n3 Allocation input n4 Allocation input n5 Allocation input n6 Time delay EXT 1 Time delay EXT 2 Time delay EXT 3 Time delay EXT 4 1.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu D Allocation : Thermal overload : THERM OVERLOAD Allocation : Thermal alarm : ALARM Allocation : Block start : FORBIDDEN START Allocation : I>> Allocation : tI>> Allocation : Io> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : Io>> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tI2> 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second No No 1 minute No
10 minutes 0 1 1 minute
5 V (range A) 20 V (range B) 5 V (range A) 20 V (range B) 0,1 second
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P225/EN SV/B11 Page 10/16 D Allocation : tI2>> Allocation : Excessive long start : EXCES LONG START Allocation : Start rotor while running : tIstall Allocation : Locked rotor at start : LOCKED ROTOR Allocation : tI< Allocation : CB failure : CB FAIL. Allocation : Open trip circuit : TRIP CIRCUIT FAIL Allocation : t RTD1 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD1 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD2 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD2 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD3 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD3 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD4 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD4 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD5 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD5 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD6 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD6 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD7 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD7 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD8 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD8 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD9 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD9 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD10 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD10 TRIP (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 3 (optional) Allocation : EXT 1 Allocation : EXT 2 Allocation : EXT 3 Allocation : EXT 4 Allocation : Successful start : SUCCESSFUL START Allocation : tV< Allocation : Load shedding further to a voltage dip : VOLTAGE DIP Allocation : tV> Allocation : Bus voltage too low to enable a start : BUS VOLTAGE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Setting MiCOM P225 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Setting MiCOM P225 1.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu EQU. A Toperat EQU. A Treset EQU. B Toperat EQU. B Treset EQU. C Toperat EQU. C Treset EQU. D Toperat EQU. D Treset 1.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu 5 Allocation : Thermal overload : THERM OVERLOAD Allocation : Thermal alarm : ALARM 0 0 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Block start on thermal base : FORBID START 0 Allocation : I>> Allocation : tI>> Allocation : Io> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : Io>> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tI2> Allocation : tI2>> Allocation : Excessive long start : EXCES LONG START Allocation : Stalled rotor while running : tIstall Allocation : Locked rotor at start : LOCKED ROTOR Allocation : tI< Allocation : Block start on start number base : START NB LIMIT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Block start on time between start base : T betw 0 2 Start Allocation : tRTD1 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD1 TRIP (optional) Allocation : tRTD2 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD2 TRIP (optional) Allocation : tRTD3 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD3 TRIP (optional) Allocation : tRTD4 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD4 TRIP (optional) Allocation : tRTD5 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD5 TRIP (optional) Allocation : tRTD6 ALARM (optional) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P225/EN SV/B11 Page 12/16 5 Allocation : tRTD6 TRIP (optional) Allocation : tRTD7 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD7 TRIP (optional) Allocation : tRTD8 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD8 TRIP (optional) Allocation : tRTD9 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD9 TRIP (optional) Allocation : tRTD10 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD10 TRIP (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 3 (optional) Allocation : EXT 1 Allocation : EXT 2 Allocation : EXT 3 Allocation : EXT 4 Allocation : Block start on Anti-back spin base : ABS Allocation : tV< Allocation : Load shedding further to a voltage dip : VOLTAGE DIP Allocation : tV> Allocation : Bus voltage too low to enable a start : BUS VOLTAGE Allocation : Close remote control (com RS485) : CLOSE ORDER Allocation : Trip remote control (com RS485) : TRIP ORDER Allocation : Remote control 1 (com RS485) : ORDER 1 Allocation : Remote control 2 (com RS485) : ORDER 2 Allocation : Successful start : SUCCESSFUL START Allocation : t EQU. A Allocation : t EQU. B Allocation : t EQU. C Allocation : t EQU. D Allocation : CB OPEN TIME Allocation : CB OPER NB Allocation : SAn Allocation : CB failure : CB FAIL. Allocation : Open trip circuit : TRIP CIRCUIT FAIL Allocation : Group 2 active setting group : GROUP 2 ACTIVE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Setting MiCOM P225 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Setting MiCOM P225 1.5.8 LATCH AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu Latching of RL2 relay : LATCH RL2 Latching of RL3 relay : LATCH RL3 Latching of RL4 relay : LATCH RL4 Latching of RL5 relay : LATCH RL5 1.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu Allocation output relay n1 : Thermal overload : THERM OVERLOAD Allocation output relay n1 : tI>> Allocation output relay n1 : tIo> Allocation output relay n1 : tIo>> Allocation output relay n1 : tI2> Allocation output relay n1 : tI2>> Allocation output relay n1 : Excessive long start : EXCES LONG START Allocation output relay n1 : Stalled rotor while running : tIstall Allocation output relay n1 : Locked rotor at start : LOCKED ROTOR Allocation output relay n1 : tI< Allocation output relay n1 : tRTD1 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tRTD2 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tRTD3 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tRTD4 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tRTD5 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tRTD6 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tRTD7 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tRTD8 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tRTD9 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tRTD10 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 1 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 3 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : EXT 1 Allocation output relay n1 : EXT 2 Allocation output relay n1 : t EQU. A Allocation output relay n1 : t EQU. B Allocation output relay n1 : t EQU. C Allocation output relay n1 : t EQU. D Allocation output relay n1 : tV<
No No No No
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Allocation output relay n1 : Load shedding further to a voltage dip : No VOLTAGE DIP Allocation output relay n1 : tV> No
P225/EN SV/B11 Page 14/16 1.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu (RL1 relay latching on) LATCH THERM OVERLOAD LATCH tI>> LATCH tI0> LATCH tI0>> LATCH tI2> LATCH tI2>> LATCH EXCES LONG START LATCH tIstall LATCH LOCKED ROTOR LATCH tI< LATCH t RTD 1, 2, 3 TRIP LATCH t RTD 4, 5, 6 TRIP LATCH t RTD 7, 8, 9, 10 TRIP LATCH Thermist 1, 2, 3 LATCH EXT 1 LATCH EXT 2 LATCH EQUA. A LATCH EQUA. B LATCH EQUA. C LATCH EQUA. D LATCH tV< LATCH VOLTAGE DIP LATCH tV> 1.5.11 CB FAIL submenu CB FAIL function enabled ? Threshold I< BF t BF 1.5.12 ABS (anti backspin) submenu ABS (anti backspin) function enabled ? t ABS 1.5.13 BUS VOLTAGE CTRL submenu Bus voltage control function enabled ? Threshold V BUS No 5 V (range A) 20 V (range B) No 1 second No 10% In 0,03 second No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Setting MiCOM P225
Setting MiCOM P225 1.5.14 CB SUPERVISION submenu Trip circuit supervision function enabled ? t SUP CB opening time function enabled ? CB OPENING TIME CB operation number function enabled ? CB operation number S A n function enabled ? SAn Exponent n value TRIP T CLOSE T 1.6 1.6.1 CONSIGNATION Menu DISTURB RECORD submenu PRE-TIME POST-TIME Disturbance Record Trig
No 0,1 second No 0 ,05 second No 0 No 0 1 0,2 second 0,2 second
0,1 second 0,1 second ON INST
Setting MiCOM P225
BLANK PAGE
Installation Guide MiCOM P225
P225/EN IN/B11
INSTALLATION GUIDE
P225/EN IN/B11 Page 1/12
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
GENERAL
Reception of the relays Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
3
3 3
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.7
HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT INSTALLING THE RELAYS UNPACKING STORAGE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE
Connection of the MiCOM P225 relay Operating conditions of the MiCOM P225 relay Replacement of the batteries Current transformer circuits Dielectric withstand test Removal and destruction of the MiCOM P225 relay Removal Destruction Technical specifications
4 5 6 7 8 9
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10
8. 9.
MICOM PX2X SERIE CABLE TERMINAL FOR MIDOS CONNECTORS 11 CASE DIMENSIONS 12
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
GENERAL
Reception of the relays Protection relays are generally robust. However it is appropriate to treat them with care before installing them on site. As soon as they arrive, the relays should be examined immediately, looking for any deterioration which could have occurred during transport. If there is any deterioration, make a claim against the forwarding company and inform Schneider Electric as soon as possible. Relays not intended for immediate installation must be stored in their protective polyethylene packaging.
1.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Relays use components sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal housing. Consequently, the internal module must not be taken out pointlessly. When handling the module outside its housing, be very careful to avoid any contact with electrical connections and components. If it is removed from its housing for storage, the module must be placed in electrically conductive antistatic packaging. No configuration setting is possible in the module. We therefore advise you not to dismantle it pointlessly. The printed circuit boards are interconnected. They are not designed for disconnection by the user. Avoid touching the printed circuit boards. They are made with complementary metal-oxide semiconductors (CMOS) and the static electricity discharged by the human body has an adverse effect on them.
2.
HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

The usual movements of a person easily generate electrostatic energy which may reach several thousand volts. The discharging of this voltage into devices comprising semiconductors, when handling electronic circuits, can cause severe deterioration. Such damage is not necessarily visible immediately. Nevertheless, it reduces the reliability of the circuit. Electronic circuits are completely protected against any electrostatic discharge when inside their housing. Do not expose them to any risk by needlessly taking the modules out of their housings. Each module has the best possible protection for its devices consisting of semiconductors. However, should it be necessary to withdraw the module from its housing, please take the following precautions to preserve the great reliability and long service life for which the equipment was designed and manufactured. 1. 2. Before taking the module out of its housing, touch the housing to balance your electrostatic potential. When handling the module, hold it by its front plate, or by its frame or by the edges of the printed circuit board. Do not touch the electronic components, the printed circuit conductors and the connectors. Before passing the module to another person, shake hands with him or her for example to balance your electrostatic potential. Place the module on an antistatic surface or an electrically conductive surface with the same potential as yourself. To store or transport the module, place it in conductive packaging.
3. 4. 5.
If you carry out any measurements on the internal electronic circuits of a device in service, earth yourself to exposed conductive parts by linking yourself to the housing by a conductive strap attached to your wrist. The resistance to earth of the conductive strap which you attach to your wrist and to the housing must be between 500 k and 10 M. If you do not have a device of this type, you must remain permanently in contact with the housing to prevent any static energy accumulating. The instruments used to take the measurements must be earthed to the housing insofar as this is possible. For further information on the procedures for safe working with all the electronic equipment, please consult standards BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. In a special handling area we strongly advise you to undertake a detailed analysis of the electronic circuits and working conditions according to the BS and IEC standards mentioned above.
3.
INSTALLING THE RELAYS

The relays are supplied either individually or mounted in a cubicle. If separate relays have to be installed according to a particular drawing, please follow the mounting details indicated in publication R7012. If a MMLG test unit has to be incorporated, position it to the right of the set of relays (looking at them from the front). The modules must still be protected in their metal housings during installation on a cubicle. The design of the relays makes it possible to reach the mounting holes easily without taking off the cover. For individually mounted relays, a positioning diagram is normally supplied to indicate the centre of the holes and the layout of the cubicle. The corresponding dimensions are also indicated in publication P225/EN BR/Cb.
4.
UNPACKING
When unpacking and installing relays, take great care to avoid damaging the parts and changing the settings. Relays must be handled only by people who are experts in this field. As far as possible, the installation must remain clean, dry, free from dust and free from excessive vibration. The site must be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays removed from their housings must not be exposed to dust or humidity. To this end, it is necessary to take great care when installing relays whilst construction work is taking place on the same site.
5.
STORAGE
If the relays do not have to be installed immediately on reception, they must be stored protected against dust and humidity in their original carton. If dehumidifying crystals are placed in the relay packaging, it is advisable not to remove them. The effect of the dehumidifying crystals is reduced if the packaging is exposed to ambient conditions. To restore their original effectiveness, you need only to heat the crystals slightly for around an hour, before replacing them in their delivery carton. As soon as the packaging is opened, the dust which has accumulated on the carton risks settling on the relays. In the presence of moisture, the carton and the packaging can become humidified to the point where the effectiveness of the dehumidifying crystals is reduced. The temperature for storage should remain between - 25 C and + 70 C.
6.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE DOING ANY WORK ON THE MICOM P225 RELAY. Health and safety The safety instructions described in this document are intended to guarantee correct installation and use of the MiCOM P225 relay and to avoid any damage. All persons directly or indirectly concerned with the use of these devices must be familiar with these safety instructions. The meaning of the symbols The meaning of the symbols which may be used on the equipment or in the product documentation is as indicated below:
!
Important : refer to the product documentation Important : risk of electrocution Protective/safety earth * Functional earth * Note : this symbol can also be used for a protective/safety earth on a terminal strip or in a subassembly, for example for the electrical power supply. *NOTE : The term "earth" used in the product documentation is the direct equivalent of the term "exposed conductive parts" which is also used.
7.
7.1
INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE

Connection of the MiCOM P225 relay
The personnel in charge of the installation, commissioning and maintenance of a MiCOM P225 relay must apply adequate procedures to guarantee safety when using the equipment. Before installation, commissioning or maintenance on the equipment, consult the relevant chapters in the technical documentation of the relay. The terminal blocks of the relays may have a dangerously high voltage during installation, commissioning or maintenance, if electrical isolation is not carried out. Access to the connectors at the rear of the relays can present risks of electrocution and thermal shock. Before you consider energization, the MiCOM P225 relay must be connected to earth via the terminal provided for this purpose. Unless otherwise indicated in the technical data chapter of the product documentation, the minimum size recommended for the earth wire is 2.5 mm2. Before energising your MiCOM P225 relay, please check the following points: 7.2 Rated voltage and polarity of the auxiliary power supply Current value of the current transformer circuit and integrity of the connections Integrity of the earth connection.
Operating conditions of the MiCOM P225 relay The operation of the MiCOM P225 relay must comply with the electrical and environmental requirements described in this document.
7.3
Replacement of the batteries
The internal batteries, if used, must be replaced by batteries corresponding to the type recommended. They must be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid any risk of damage to the equipment. 7.4 Current transformer circuits Never open the auxiliary circuit of a live current transformer. The high voltage produced may cause serious physical injury and damage the insulation of the equipment. 7.5 Dielectric withstand test Following an insulation test, the capacitors may still be charged with a potentially dangerous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage must be progressively brought down to zero to discharge the capacitors before disconnecting the test wiring. 7.6 7.6.1 Removal and destruction of the MiCOM P225 relay Removal
The auxiliary power supply circuit of the relay can include capacitors for the power supply or for earthing. To avoid any risk of electrocution or thermal shock, it is appropriate to isolate the relay completely (the two direct current poles) from any power supply, then to discharge the capacitors in complete safety via the external terminals, before taking the device out of service.
P225/EN IN/B11 Page 10/12 7.6.2 Destruction
It is recommended that the relay should not be incinerated nor thrown into a river. MiCOM relays and their components should be disposed of and recycled strictly in compliance with regulations on safety and the environment. Before destruction, remove the batteries, taking the necessary precautions to avoid any risk of electrocution. 7.7 Technical specifications Insulation level: IEC 1010-1: class I 1990/A2: 1995 This device must be connected to earth to guarantee the safety of the user. EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 class I IEC 1010-1: 1990/A2: 1995 Conformity is established by pollution level 2 reference to the generic safety standards. EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 pollution level 2 73/23/EEC Conformity with the European Commission directive relating to low voltages. Conformity is established by reference to the generic safety standards.
Environment:
Product safety:
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 EN 60905: 1992/A3: 1995
8.
MiCOM Px2x SERIE CABLE TERMINAL FOR MIDOS CONNECTORS

Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8 (wire size 0.75 - 1.5mm) Schneider Electric reference: ZB9128 015
Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8mm (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm) Schneider Electric reference: ZB9128 016
P0166ENc
M4 90 Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 0.25 - 1.65mm) Schneider Electric reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 901
M4 90 Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm) Schneider Electric reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 900
P0167ENc
Suppliers : BICC Electrical Connectors Elpress Ltd Erma Ltd Davico Industrial
9.
CASE DIMENSIONS
MiCOM P225 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting. Weight : about 3.7 Kg External size : Height Width Depth Case Front panel Case Front panel Case (flush part) Case + Front panel 156 mm 177 mm 148,1 mm 155 mm 223 mm 250 mm
150.2 (5.91) 148.1 (5.83) 4 holes 3.4 (0.134) 129.6 (5.10) 103.6 (4.08) 10.7 (0.42) 23.7 (0.93)
168 (6.61)
159 0 (6.26)
+ 0.2
Flush mounting
(Top view) Front panel
1510.2 (5.94) (Panel cut-out)
4 holes 4.4 (0.18)
30TE 155 (6.10) 25.1 (0.99)
1.5 (0.059)
Flush mounting 223 (8.77)
MiCOM
Temperature RTD1= 113 C
Trip Alarm Equip. fail Aux. supply Aux. 1 Aux. 2 Aux. 3 Aux. 4
P225
177 (6.97)
156 (6.14)
11 (0.43) (Front view) (Right side view)

P0245ENb
Test Report MiCOM P225
P225/EN RS/B11
TEST REPORT
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 1/20
CONTENT
1. 2. 3. 4.
4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5 4.7.6 4.7.7 4.7.8 4.7.9 4.7.10 4.7.11 4.8 4.8.1
RELAY IDENTIFICATION INSPECTION MEASUREMENT VALUE VERIFICATION PARAMETERS

OP. PARAMETERS menu CONFIGURATION menu CONFIG. SELECT submenu CT/VT RATIO submenu COMMUNICATION MODBUSTM Menu COMMUNICATION Courier Menu COMMUNICATION IEC 60870-5-103 Menu PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu [66] START NUMBER submenu MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu INPUTS submenu AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu LATCH AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu (RL1 relay latching on) CB SUPERVISION submenu CONSIGNATION Menu DISTURB RECORD submenu
3 4 5 6
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 9 12 12 12 12 13 13 15 15 17 17 19 20 20 20
BLANK PAGE
1.
RELAY IDENTIFICATION
Commissioning date : Engineer : Motor reference : Circuit-breaker/Fuse-contactor reference : MiCOM relay type Serial number Earth current setting range Voltage input range Auxiliary voltage supply Communication protocol Language Firmware version P225
2.
INSPECTION
Put a cross after each inspection stage. Serial number check ? All current transformer shorting switches closed ? Wiring checked against diagram (if available) ? Case earthing link ? Current circuit wirings ? Voltage circuit wiring ? Trip circuit wiring (RL1 relay) ? 52a auxiliary contact wired to logic input No1 (EL1) ? RTDs circuit wirings (if option fitted) ? Analogue output wirings (if option fitted) ? Other circuit wirings Test block connections checked (if available) ? Auxiliary voltage checked ? Auxiliary voltage magnitude ? Control voltage polarity for logic input checked ? MiCOM relay fully plugged-in to its case ? Meters reset (MEASUREMENTS 2, PROCESS, TRIP STATISTICS and CB MONITORING submenus) ? At the end of the tests, MiCOM relay with the right Setting File ?
3.
MEASUREMENT VALUE VERIFICATION

Applied value Phase A current input Phase B current input Phase C current input Earth current input Phase A - phase C voltage input A A A A V Relay value A A A A V
4.
4.1
PARAMETERS
OP. PARAMETERS menu Password Reference Frequency Date Time Hz
4.2 4.2.1
CONFIGURATION menu CONFIG. SELECT submenu Way to switch over active setting group Active setting group Default display Start detection criterion Analogue output type (optional) Value transmitted by the analogue output 1 (optional) Maximum analogue output 1 rating (optional) Value transmitted by the analogue output 2 (optional) Maximum analogue output 2 rating (optional) RTD type (optional) Thermistor 1 type (optional) Thermistor 2 type (optional) Thermistor 3 type (optional)
4.2.2
CT/VT RATIO submenu Line CT primary Line CT secondary Earth/Ground CT primary Earth/Ground CT secondary Line VT primary Line VT secondary
Test Report MiCOM P225 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus Allocation : Thermal overload : THERM OVERLOAD Allocation : Thermal alarm : ALARM Allocation : tI>> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tI2> Allocation : tI2>> Allocation : tI< Allocation : Excessive long start : EXCES LONG START Allocation : Stalled rotor while running : tIstall Allocation : Locked rotor at start : LOCKED ROTOR Allocation : Emergency restart : EMERG START Allocation : Block start : FORBIDDEN START Allocation : t RTD1 ALARM, t RTD2 ALARM, t RTD3 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD1 TRIP, tRTD2 TRIP, tRTD3 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD4 ALARM, t RTD5 ALARM, t RTD6 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD4 TRIP, tRTD5 TRIP, tRTD6 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD7 ALARM, t RTD8 ALARM, t RTD9 ALARM, t RTD10 ALARM (optional) Allocation : tRTD7 TRIP, tRTD8 TRIP, tRTD9 TRIP, tRTD10 TRIP (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1, Thermist 2 , Thermist 3 (optional) Allocation : EXT1 Allocation : EXT2 Allocation : Motor halted : MOTOR STOPPED Allocation : Motor running : MOTOR RUNNING Allocation : Successful start : SUCCESSFUL START Allocation : tV< Allocation : Load shedding further to a voltage dip : VOLTAGE DIP Allocation : tV> Allocation : Bus voltage too low to enable a start : BUS VOLTAGE Allocation : CB failure : CB FAIL. Allocation : Open trip circuit : TRIP CIRCUIT FAIL LED 5 LED 6
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 7/20 LED 7 LED 8
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 8/20 ALARM CONFIG. submenu Presence of alarm message on RAM/battery error : BATTERY ALARM INPUT CONFIG. submenu Configuration of the logic input active state : INPUT PICK-UP (1 : active state when a control voltage is applied on) Control voltage type for the logic inputs : CONTROL VOLT 4.3 COMMUNICATION MODBUSTM Menu Communication enabled ? Data rate Parity Number of stop bits Relay address Date format configuration 4.4 COMMUNICATION Courier Menu Communication enabled ? Relay address 4.5 COMMUNICATION IEC 60870-5-103 Menu Communication enabled ? Data rate Relay address ( Yes / No) ( Yes / No) ( Yes / No) ( Yes / No)
EL 6
EL 5
EL 4
EL 3
EL 2
EL 1
Bauds
Bauds
Test Report MiCOM P225 4.6 PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu Thermal overload function enabled ? Thermal inhibition on starting function enabled ? Threshold I> Ke Te1 Te2 Tr RTD1 influence (optional) Thermal alarm enabled ? Thermal alarm ALARM threshold ( ( mn mn mn Yes / Yes / % Yes / % PROTECTION G 1 ( Yes / In No) No) No) No) PROTECTION G 1 ( ( Yes / Yes / In No) No)
PROTECTION G 2 ( ( Yes / Yes / In No) No)
mn mn mn ( ( Yes / Yes / % ( Yes / % PROTECTION G 2 ( Yes / In No) No) No) No)
Block start on thermal base function enabled ? (

FORBID START threshold [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu Short-circuit function enabled ? Threshold I>> tI>> [50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu
PROTECTION G 1 ( Yes / Ion No)
PROTECTION G 2 ( Yes / Ion No)
Io> element of the earth fault function enabled ?

Threshold Io> tIo>
Io>> element of the earth fault function enabled ?

Threshold Io>> tIo>> [46] UNBALANCE submenu
Yes / Ion
No)
Yes / Ion
No)
PROTECTION G 1 Yes / In No)
PROTECTION G 2 ( Yes / In No)
I2> element of the unbalance function enabled ? (

Threshold I2> tI2>
I2>> element of the unbalance function enabled ? (

Time multiplier setting TMS I2>> Threshold I2>>
Yes /
No)
Yes /
No)
In
In
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 10/20 [27] UNDERVOLTAGE submenu Undervoltage function enabled ? Threshold V< tV< Inhibition V< at start [59] OVERVOLTAGE submenu Overvoltage function enabled ? Threshold V> tV> [48] EXCES LONG START submenu Excessive long start function enabled ? Threshold Istart tIstart [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu Block rotor function enabled ? tIstall Stalled rotor function enabled ? Threshold Istall Locked rotor at start function enabled ? [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu Loss of load function enabled ? Threshold I< tI< Tinhib [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional) Thermistor 1 enabled Thermist 1 Thermistor 2 enabled Thermist 2 Thermistor 3 enabled Thermist 3 ( ( PROTECTION G 1 ( Yes / k Yes / k Yes / k No) ( No) ( No) ( ( Yes / I Yes / No) ( No) ( PROTECTION G 1 ( Yes / No) PROTECTION G 1 ( Yes / I No) ( Yes / No) ( PROTECTION G 1 ( Yes / V No)
Test Report MiCOM P225 PROTECTION G 2 ( Yes / V No)
Yes /
No)
PROTECTION G 1 ( Yes / V No)
PROTECTION G 2 ( Yes / V No)
PROTECTION G 2 ( Yes / I No)
PROTECTION G 2 ( Yes / No)
Yes / I Yes /
No)
No)
PROTECTION G 2 ( Yes / k Yes / k Yes / k No) No) No)
Test Report MiCOM P225 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) RTD1 enabled ? RTD1 ALARM t RTD1 ALARM RTD1 TRIP tRTD1 TRIP RTD2 enabled ? RTD2 ALARM t RTD2 ALARM RTD2 TRIP tRTD2 TRIP RTD3 enabled ? RTD3 ALARM t RTD3 ALARM RTD3 TRIP tRTD3 TRIP RTD4 enabled ? RTD4 ALARM t RTD4 ALARM RTD4 TRIP tRTD4 TRIP RTD5 enabled ? RTD5 ALARM t RTD5 ALARM RTD5 TRIP tRTD5 TRIP RTD6 enabled ? RTD6 ALARM t RTD6 ALARM RTD6 TRIP tRTD6 TRIP RTD7 enabled ? RTD7 ALARM t RTD7 ALARM RTD7 TRIP tRTD7 TRIP C ( Yes / C No) C ( Yes / C No) C ( Yes / C No) C ( Yes / C No) C ( Yes / C No) C ( Yes / C No) C PROTECTION G 1 ( Yes / C No)
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 11/20 PROTECTION G 2 ( Yes / C No)
Yes / C
No)
Yes / C
No)
Yes / C
No)
Yes / C
No)
Yes / C
No)
Yes / C
No)
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 12/20 RTD8 enabled ? RTD8 ALARM t RTD8 ALARM RTD8 TRIP tRTD8 TRIP RTD9 enabled ? RTD9 ALARM t RTD9 ALARM RTD9 TRIP tRTD9 TRIP RTD10 enabled ? RTD10 ALARM t RTD10 ALARM RTD10 TRIP tRTD10 TRIP 4.7 4.7.1 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu [66] START NUMBER submenu Start Number Limitation function enabled ? T reference Hot start number Cold start number T interdiction 4.7.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu Time Between Start function enabled ? T betw 2 start 4.7.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu Re-acceleration authorisation function enabled ? ( Voltage dip detection threshold : Detection V DIP Voltage restoration threshold : Restoration V DIP VOLTAGE DIP DURAT Treacc Yes / V V No) ( Yes / mn No) mn ( Yes / mn No) C ( Yes / C No) ( C ( Yes / C No) ( C ( Yes / C No) (
Test Report MiCOM P225 Yes / C No)
Yes / C
No)
Yes / C
No)
Test Report MiCOM P225 4.7.4 INPUTS submenu Allocation : input n2 Allocation : input n3 Allocation : input n4 Allocation : input n5 Allocation : input n6 Time delay EXT 1 Time delay EXT 2 Time delay EXT 3 Time delay EXT 4 4.7.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu D Allocation : Thermal overload : THERM OVERLOAD Allocation : Thermal alarm : ALARM Allocation : Block start : FORBIDDEN START Allocation : I>> Allocation : tI>> Allocation : Io> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : Io>> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tI2> Allocation : tI2>> Allocation : Excessive long start : EXCES LONG START Allocation : Stalled rotor while running : tIstall Allocation : Locked rotor at start : LOCKED ROTOR Allocation : tI< Allocation : CB failure : CB FAIL. Allocation : Open trip circuit : TRIP CIRCUIT FAIL Allocation : t RTD1 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD1 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD2 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD2 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD3 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD3 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD4 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD4 TRIP (optional) C
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 14/20 D Allocation : t RTD5 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD5 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD6 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD6 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD7 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD7 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD8 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD8 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD9 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD9 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD10 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD10 TRIP (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1 (option) Allocation : Thermist 2 (option) Allocation : Thermist 3 (option) Allocation : EXT 1 Allocation : EXT 2 Allocation : EXT 3 Allocation : EXT 4 Allocation : Successful start : SUCCESSFUL START Allocation : tV< Allocation : Load shedding further to a voltage dip : VOLTAGE DIP Allocation : tV> Allocation : Bus voltage too low to enable a start : BUS VOLTAGE C B
Test Report MiCOM P225 A
Test Report MiCOM P225 4.7.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu EQU. A Toperat EQU. A Treset EQU. B Toperat EQU. B Treset EQU. C Toperat EQU. C Treset EQU. D Toperat EQU. D Treset 4.7.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu 5 Allocation : Thermal overload : THERM OVERLOAD Allocation : Thermal alarm : ALARM Allocation : Block start on thermal base : FORBID START Allocation : I>> Allocation : tI>> Allocation : Io> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : Io>> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tI2> Allocation : tI2>> Allocation : Excessive long start : EXCES LONG START Allocation : Stalled rotor while running : tIstall Allocation : Locked rotor at start : LOCKED ROTOR Allocation : tI< Allocation : Block start on start number base : START NB LIMIT Allocation : Block start on time between start base : T betw 2 Start Allocation : t RTD1 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD1 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD2 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD2 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD3 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD3 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD4 ALARM (optional) 4
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 16/20 5 Allocation : t RTD4 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD5 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD5 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD6 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD6 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD7 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD7 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD8 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD8 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD9 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD9 TRIP (optional) Allocation : t RTD10 ALARM (optional) Allocation : t RTD10 TRIP (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 3 (optional) Allocation : EXT 1 Allocation : EXT 2 Allocation : EXT 3 Allocation : EXT 4 Allocation : Block start on Anti-back spin base : ABS Allocation : tV< Allocation : Load shedding further to a voltage dip : VOLTAGE DIP Allocation : tV> Allocation : Bus voltage too low to enable a start : BUS VOLTAGE Allocation : Close remote control (com RS485) : CLOSE ORDER Allocation : Trip remote control (com RS485) : TRIP ORDER Allocation : Remote control 1 (com RS485) : ORDER 1 Allocation : Remote control 2 (com RS485) : ORDER 2 Allocation : Successful start : SUCCESSFUL START Allocation : t EQU. A Allocation : t EQU. B Allocation : t EQU. C Allocation : t EQU. D 4 3
Test Report MiCOM P225 2
Test Report MiCOM P225 5 Allocation : CB OPEN TIME Allocation : CB OPER NB Allocation : S A n Allocation : CB failure : CB FAIL. Allocation : Open trip circuit : TRIP CIRCUIT FAIL Allocation : Group 2 active setting group : GROUP 2 ACTIVE 4.7.8 LATCH AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu Latching of RL2 relay : LATCH RL2 Latching of RL3 relay: LATCH RL3 Latching of RL4 relay: LATCH RL4 Latching of RL5 relay: LATCH RL5 4.7.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu Allocation output relay n1 : Thermal overload : THERM OVERLOAD Allocation output relay n1 : tI>> Allocation output relay n1 : tIo> Allocation output relay n1 : tIo>> Allocation output relay n1 : tI2> Allocation output relay n1 : tI2>> Allocation output relay n1 : Excessive long start : EXCES LONG START Allocation output relay n1 : Stalled rotor while running : tIstall Allocation output relay n1 : Locked rotor at start : LOCKED ROTOR Allocation output relay n1 : tI< Allocation output relay n1 : t RTD1 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : t RTD2 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : t RTD3 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : t RTD4 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : t RTD5 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : t RTD6 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : t RTD7 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : t RTD8 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : t RTD9 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : t RTD10 TRIP (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 1 (optional) ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) ( ( ( ( Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / No) No) No) No) 4
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 17/20 3 2
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 18/20 Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 3 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : EXT 1 Allocation output relay n1 : EXT 2 Allocation output relay n1 : t EQU. A Allocation output relay n1 : t EQU. B Allocation output relay n1 : t EQU. C Allocation output relay n1 : t EQU. D Allocation output relay n1 : tV< Allocation output relay n1 : Load shedding further to a voltage dip : VOLTAGE DIP Allocation output relay n1 : tV> ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No)
Test Report MiCOM P225 4.7.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu (RL1 relay latching on) LATCH THERM OVERLOAD LATCH tI>> LATCH tI0> LATCH tI0>> LATCH tI2> LATCH tI2>> LATCH EXCES LONG START LATCH tIstall LATCH LOCKED ROTOR LATCH tI< LATCH t RTD 1, 2, 3 TRIP LATCH t RTD 4, 5, 6 TRIP LATCH tRTD 7, 8, 9, 10 TRIP LATCH Thermist 1, 2, 3 LATCH EXT 1 LATCH EXT 2 LATCH EQUA. A LATCH EQUA. B LATCH EQUA. C LATCH EQUA. D LATCH tV< LATCH VOLTAGE DIP LATCH tV> ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / Yes / No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No) No)
CB FAIL submenu CB FAIL function enabled ? Threshold I< BF t BF ( Yes / In No)
ABS submenu (anti backspin) ABS function enabled ? t ABS ( Yes / mn No)
BUS VOLTAGE CTRL submenu Bus voltage control function enabled ? Threshold V BUS ( Yes / V No)
P225/EN RS/B11 Page 20/20 4.7.11 CB SUPERVISION submenu Trip circuit supervision function enabled ? t SUP CB opening time function enabled ? CB opening time CB operation number function enabled ? CB operation number S A n function enabled ? SAn Exponent n value Trip T Close T 4.8 4.8.1 CONSIGNATION Menu DISTURB RECORD submenu Pre-Time Post-Time Disturbance Record Trig ( Yes / No) ( Yes / No) ( Yes / No) ( Yes / No)
www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P225/EN T/B11
www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P225/EN T/C21

Micom p225

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Micom p225

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MiCOM P225

Motor Protection Relay

Update Documentation MiCOM P225

Update Documentation MiCOM P225

Update Documentation MiCOM P225

P225/EN AD/B21 (AD) -1

P225 UPDATE DOCUMENTATION

P225/EN AD/B21 (AD) -2

Update Documentation MiCOM P225

USER GUIDE (P225/EN FT/B11)

Update Documentation MiCOM P225

P225/EN AD/B21 (AD) -3

Update Documentation MiCOM P225

P225/EN AD/B21 (AD) -5

Update Documentation MiCOM P225

www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P225/EN AD/B21

2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

Technical Guide MiCOM P225

P225/EN T/B11 Page 1/2

MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY MiCOM P225 CONTENT

P225/EN T/B11 Page 2/2

Technical Guide MiCOM P225

Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Safety Section Page 1/8

Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 2/8 Safety Section

Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Safety Section Page 3/8

HEALTH AND SAFETY

Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 4/8 Safety Section

SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.

DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 8/8 Safety Section

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Connection Diagrams MiCOM P225

Connection Diagrams MiCOM P225

P225/EN CO/B11 Page 1/12

P225/EN CO/B11 Page 2/12

Connection Diagrams MiCOM P225

The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT.

B C S1 Programmable tripping output relay 1A

Programmable output relay

RTD1 common RTD2 common

MiCOM P225 typical connection

RTD3 common RTD4 Analogue output 1 active source mode

Alternative : Connection to 2 phase CTs + a core balanced CT.

P2 input L1 Speed switch signal input L2

10z 12d 12b 12z

S2 Programmable input L3 Programmable input L4

RTD6 common 2-24 Volt

RTD7 active source mode

1A Programmable input L5 Programmable input L6

(6) If 2 analogue output option :

Case earth (5)

16b 16z 18d 18b 18z

RTD8 common RTD9 common 2-24 Volt

RTD10 common Case earth connection

RS 485 communication port

P225/EN CO/B11 Page 4/12 1.2 Typical application diagram

Connection Diagrams MiCOM P225

Core balanced CT CT phaseA CT phaseB